S-1/A
Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 7, 2005
Registration No. 333-123028


SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D.C. 20549
 
Amendment No. 1
to
FORM S-1
REGISTRATION STATEMENT UNDER
THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
 
CITI TRENDS, INC.
(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)
         
Delaware   5600   52-2150697
(State or other jurisdiction of
incorporation or organization)
  (Primary standard industrial
classification code number)
  (IRS employer
identification number)
 
102 Fahm Street
Savannah, Georgia 31401
(912) 236-1561
(Address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of
registrant’s principal executive offices)
 
R. Edward Anderson
Chief Executive Officer
Citi Trends, Inc.
102 Fahm Street
Savannah, Georgia 31401
(912) 236-1561
(Name, address, including zip code, and telephone number, including area code, of agent for service)
 
Copies to:
     
William F. Schwitter, Esq.   Richard C. Tilghman, Jr., Esq.
Paul, Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP   Wm. David Chalk, Esq.
75 East 55th Street   DLA Piper Rudnick Gray Cary US LLP
New York, New York 10022   6225 Smith Avenue
(212) 318-6000   Baltimore, Maryland 21209
(212) 319-4090 (fax)   (410) 580-3000
    (410) 580-3001 (fax)
 
         Approximate date of commencement of proposed sale to the public: As soon as practicable after this Registration Statement becomes effective.
         If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on a delayed or continuous basis pursuant to Rule 415 under the Securities Act of 1933, check the following box.    o
         If this Form is filed to register additional securities for an offering pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.    o
         If this Form is a post effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(c) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.    o
         If this Form is a post effective amendment filed pursuant to Rule 462(d) under the Securities Act, check the following box and list the Securities Act registration statement number of the earlier effective registration statement for the same offering.    o
         If delivery of the prospectus is expected to be made pursuant to Rule 434, please check the following box.    o
 
CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE
             
             
             
Title of Each Class of     Proposed Maximum     Amount of
Securities to be Registered     Aggregate Offering Price(1)(2)     Registration Fee(3)
             
Common Stock, par value $.01 per share
    $57,500,000     $6,767.75
             
             
(1)  Estimated solely for the purpose of calculating the registration fee pursuant to Rule 457(o) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
(2)  Includes shares of common stock subject to the underwriters’ over-allotment option.
(3)  Previously paid.
     The Registrant hereby amends this registration statement on such date or dates as may be necessary to delay its effective date until the Registrant shall file a further amendment which specifically states that this registration statement shall thereafter become effective in accordance with Section 8(a) of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended or until the registration statement shall become effective on such date as the Securities and Exchange Commission, acting pursuant to said Section 8(a), may determine.



Table of Contents

The information in this prospectus is not complete and may be changed. These securities may not be sold until the registration statement filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission is effective. This prospectus is not an offer to sell these securities and we are not soliciting offers to buy these securities in any state where the offer or sale is not permitted.
Subject To Completion, Dated April 7, 2005
Preliminary Prospectus
                        Shares
(CITITRENDS LOGO)
Common Stock
$             per share
This is an initial public offering of shares of common stock of Citi Trends, Inc. Citi Trends is offering                      shares of common stock and the selling stockholders identified in this prospectus are offering                      shares of common stock.
We anticipate that the initial public offering price will be between $          and $           per share. The market price of the shares after the offering may be higher or lower than the offering price.
We intend to list our common stock on the Nasdaq National Market under the symbol “CTRN.”
Investing in the common stock involves risks. See “Risk Factors” beginning on page 6.
                 
    Per Share   Total
     
Price to the public
  $       $    
Underwriting discount
  $       $    
Proceeds to Citi Trends, Inc. 
  $       $    
Proceeds to the selling stockholders
  $       $    
We and the selling stockholders have granted an option to the underwriters to purchase up to a maximum of                     additional shares of our common stock within 30 days following the date of this prospectus to cover over-allotments, if any. The underwriters may purchase up to  of the additional shares from us and up to                of the additional shares from the selling stockholders.
The underwriters expect to deliver the shares of common stock to purchasers on or about                     , 2005.
Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this prospectus is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.
 
CIBC World Markets
Piper Jaffray SG Cowen & Co. Wachovia Securities
The date of this prospectus is                     , 2005


Table of Contents

(CITITRENDS COVER)


Table of Contents
         
    Page
     
    1  
    6  
    16  
    17  
    17  
    18  
    19  
    20  
    22  
    33  
    42  
    55  
    57  
    58  
    62  
    64  
    67  
    67  
    67  
    F-1  
 FORM OF NOMINATING AGREEMENT
 AMENDED AND RESTATED CONSULTING AGREEMENT
 CONSENT OF KPMG LLP


Table of Contents

Prospectus Summary
This summary highlights information contained in other parts of this prospectus, and because it is only a summary, it does not contain all of the information that you should consider before buying shares. You should read the entire prospectus carefully. All share numbers in this prospectus reflect a                     -for-one stock split of our common stock, which will occur simultaneously with the closing of this offering. Our fiscal year ends on the Saturday closest to January 31, and, except as otherwise provided, references in this prospectus to a fiscal year mean the 52- or 53-week period ended on the Saturday closest to January 31 of the succeeding year. Fiscal 2004, for example, refers to the fiscal year ended January 29, 2005.
Citi Trends, Inc.
We are a rapidly growing, value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories for the entire family. We offer quality, branded merchandise for men, women and children, including products from nationally recognized brands, as well as private label products and a limited assortment of home décor items. Our merchandise offerings are designed to appeal to the preferences of fashion conscious consumers, particularly African-Americans. Through strong relationships with our suppliers, we believe that we are able to offer our products at compelling values. We seek to provide nationally recognized branded merchandise at 20% to 60% discounts to department and specialty stores’ regular prices.
We currently operate 208 stores in both urban and rural markets in 12 states. Originally our stores were located in the Southeast, and we have recently expanded into the Mid-Atlantic region and Texas. Our stores average approximately 8,700 square feet of selling space, and our stores opened since the beginning of fiscal 2003 average approximately 10,300 square feet of selling space. Our stores are generally located in neighborhood strip shopping centers that are convenient to low and moderate income consumers. These locations allow us to serve our customers at rents that we believe are attractive, and combined with our differentiated merchandise assortment, compelling value proposition and efficient operating model, enable us to generate strong return on store investments. Our new stores typically pay back our unit investment within 12 to 14 months.
Our predecessor was founded in 1946 and grew to become a chain of family apparel stores operating in the Southeast under the Allied Department Stores name. In 1999, our chain of stores, then consisting of 85 stores throughout the Southeast, was acquired by Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P., or Hampshire Equity Partners, a private equity firm. Our management team implemented several strategies that have driven our success including refining our merchandise offerings with a focus on urban fashions for the entire family, accelerating and completing the remodeling of virtually all of the 85 acquired stores, and, executing an aggressive new store growth plan. We have
  •   grown our store base from 85 stores at the time of the acquisition to 208 stores as of March 31, 2005;
 
  •   increased average sales per store from $0.8 million in fiscal 2000 to $1.1 million in fiscal 2004;
 
  •   generated comparable store sales increases in each of the past five fiscal years;
 
  •   increased sales from $80.9 million in fiscal 2000 to $203.4 million in fiscal 2004, representing a compound annual growth rate of approximately 26%; and
 
  •   increase net income from $1.2 million in fiscal 2000 to $7.3 million in fiscal 2004.

1


Table of Contents

Our goal is to be the leading value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories. We believe the following business strengths differentiate us from our competitors and are important to our success:
  •   focus on providing a timely and fashionable assortment of urban apparel and accessories;
 
  •   superior value proposition, with nationally recognized brands offered at 20% to 60% discounts to department and specialty stores’ regular prices;
 
  •   merchandise mix that appeals to the entire family, distinguishing our stores from many competitors that focus only on women and reducing our exposure to fashion trends and demand cycles in any single category;
 
  •   strong and flexible sourcing relationships managed by our 20-member buying team, staffed by individuals with an average of more than 20 years of retail experience;
 
  •   attractive fashion presentation and store environment similar to a specialty apparel retailer, rather than a typical off-price store; and
 
  •   highly profitable store model.
Our growth strategy is to open stores in new and existing markets, as well as to increase sales in existing stores. Adding stores in the markets we currently serve enables us to benefit from enhanced name recognition and achieve advertising and operating synergies, and entering new markets opens additional growth opportunities. In each of fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2006, we intend to open an additional 40 stores, approximately 70% of which will be located in states we currently serve. We intend to increase comparable store sales primarily through merchandising enhancements and the expansion of product categories such as home décor and intimate apparel.
Corporate Information
We are incorporated in Delaware, and our principal executive offices are located at 102 Fahm Street, Savannah, Georgia 31401, and our telephone number is (912) 236-1561. Our website address is www.cititrends.com. Information contained in, or accessible through, our website does not constitute part of this prospectus.

2


Table of Contents

The Offering
Common stock offered by Citi Trends, Inc.                     shares
 
Common stock offered by the selling stockholders                     shares
 
Common stock to be outstanding after the offering                     shares
 
Use of proceeds We estimate that the net proceeds to be received by us from this offering will be approximately $           million, after deducting underwriting discounts and commissions and offering expenses payable by us. Approximately $           million of these net proceeds will be used to redeem all of our outstanding Series A preferred stock, $.01 par value per share, or Series A Preferred Stock, and to pay all accrued and unpaid dividends thereon, and $           million will be used to repay outstanding indebtedness. We expect that the remainder of our net proceeds will be used for new store openings, the acquisition or design and construction of a new distribution center in fiscal 2006 and general corporate purposes. We will not receive any of the proceeds from the sale of shares of common stock offered by the selling stockholders.
 
Proposed Nasdaq National Market Symbol “CTRN”
Unless otherwise stated, information in this prospectus assumes:
  •   a                     for-one stock split of our common stock, which will occur simultaneously with the completion of this offering;
 
  •   no exercise of outstanding options to purchase                      shares of common stock outstanding as of                     , 2005; and
 
  •   no exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option.

3


Table of Contents

Summary Financial and Operating Data
The following table provides summary financial and operating data for each of the fiscal years in the five-year period ended January 29, 2005, including: (a) our statement of operations data for each such period, (b) additional operating data for each such period and (c) our balance sheet data as of January 29, 2005, on an actual basis and as adjusted to give effect to the receipt and application of the net proceeds from this offering. The statement of operations data for fiscal 2002, fiscal 2003 and fiscal 2004, are derived from financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus that have been audited by KPMG LLP, independent registered public accountants. The statement of operations data for fiscal 2000 and fiscal 2001 are derived from our audited financial statements that are not included in this prospectus. The summary financial and operating data set forth below should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified in their entirety by reference to, the sections of this prospectus entitled “Selected Financial and Operating Data” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for any future period.
                                             
    Fiscal Year Ended(1)
     
    February 3,   February 2,   February 1,   January 31,   January 29,
    2001   2002   2003   2004   2005
                     
    (dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
Statement of Operations Data:
                                       
 
Net sales
  $ 80,939     $ 97,933     $ 124,951     $ 157,198     $ 203,442  
 
Cost of sales
    51,762       62,050       77,807       98,145       127,308  
                                         
 
Gross profit
    29,177       35,883       47,144       59,053       76,134  
 
Selling, general and administrative
expenses
    26,834       31,405       38,760       48,845       63,594  
                                         
 
Income from operations
    2,343       4,478       8,385       10,208       12,540  
 
Interest expense(2)
    787       455       256       563       732  
                                         
 
Income before
income taxes
    1,556       4,023       8,129       9,645       11,808  
 
Income tax expense
    358       1,566       3,101       3,727       4,551  
                                         
 
Net income
  $ 1,198     $ 2,457     $ 5,028     $ 5,918     $ 7,257  
                                         
 
Net income per
common share:
                                       
   
Basic
  $       $       $       $       $    
   
Diluted
  $       $       $       $       $    
 
Weighted average shares used to compute net income per share:
                                       
   
Basic
                                       
   
Diluted
                                       
 
Additional Operating Data:
                                       
 
Number of stores:
                                       
   
Opened during period
    23       12       16       25       40  
   
Closed during period
    0       4       2       1       1  
   
Open at end of period
    115       123       137       161       200  
 
Selling square footage at end of period
    786,534       891,843       1,043,713       1,290,039       1,715,943  
 
Comparable store sales increase(3)
    17.6%       6.5%       14.6%       5.5%       3.0%  
 
Average sales per store(4)
  $ 782     $ 818     $ 961     $ 1,055     $ 1,127  
(footnotes on following page)

4


Table of Contents

                   
    As of January 29, 2005
     
    Actual   As Adjusted
         
    (in thousands)
Balance Sheet Data:
               
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 11,801     $    
 
Total assets
    70,790          
 
Total liabilities
    47,025          
 
Total stockholders’ equity
    23,765          
 
(1)  Our fiscal year ends on the Saturday closest to January 31 of each year. Fiscal years 2001, 2002, 2003 and 2004 comprise 52 weeks. Fiscal year 2000 comprises 53 weeks.
 
(2)  Our Series A Preferred Stock, which will be redeemed using a portion of the net proceeds from this offering, was reclassified as debt as of the second quarter of fiscal 2003, in accordance with the Financial Accounting Standards Board’s (“FASB”) Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 150, Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities and Equity. The amount of dividends treated as interest expense in fiscal 2004 was $324,450, fiscal 2003 was $189,000 and none in fiscal 2002.
 
(3)  Stores included in the comparable store sales calculation for any period are those stores that were opened prior to the beginning of the preceding fiscal year and were still open at the end of such period. Relocated stores and expanded stores are included in the comparable store sales results.
 
(4)  Average sales per store is defined as net sales divided by the average of stores open at the end of the prior period and stores open at the end of the current period.

5


Table of Contents

Risk Factors
An investment in shares of our common stock involves a high degree of risk. You should consider carefully the following information about these risks, together with the other information contained in this prospectus, before you decide whether to buy our common stock. The occurrence of any of the following risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
Risks Relating to Citi Trends, Inc.
Our success depends on our ability to anticipate, identify and respond rapidly to changes in consumers’ fashion tastes, and our failure to evaluate adequately fashion trends could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
The apparel industry in general and our core customer market in particular are subject to rapidly evolving fashion trends and shifting consumer demands. Accordingly, our success is heavily dependent on our ability to anticipate, identify and capitalize on emerging fashion trends, including products, styles and materials that will appeal to our target consumers. Our failure to anticipate, identify or react appropriately to changes in styles, trends, brand preferences or desired image preferences is likely to lead to lower demand for our merchandise, which could cause, among other things, sales declines, excess inventories and higher markdowns. The inaccuracy of our forecasts regarding fashion trends could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
If we are unsuccessful in competing with our retail apparel competitors, our market share could decline or our growth could be impaired and, as a result, our financial results could suffer.
The retail apparel market is highly competitive, with few barriers to entry. We compete against a diverse group of retailers, including national off-price apparel chains such as The TJX Companies, Inc., or TJX Companies, Burlington Coat Factory Warehouse Corp., or Burlington Coat Factory, and Ross Stores, Inc., or Ross Stores; mass merchants such as Wal-Mart and Kmart; smaller discount retail chains that only sell women’s products, such as Rainbow, Dots, Fashion Cents, It’s Fashions (a subsidiary of The Cato Corporation) and Simply Fashions; and general merchandise discount stores and dollar stores, which offer a variety of products, including apparel, for the value-conscious consumer. We also compete against local off-price and specialty retail stores, regional retail chains, traditional department stores, and Internet and other direct retailers.
The level of competition we face from these retailers varies depending on the product segment, as many of our competitors do not offer apparel for the entire family. Our greatest competition is generally in women’s apparel. Many of our competitors are larger than we are and have substantially greater resources than we do and, as a result, may be able to adapt better to changing market conditions, exploit new opportunities, exert greater pricing pressures on suppliers and open new stores more quickly and effectively than we can. Many of these retailers have better name recognition among consumers than we have and purchase significantly more merchandise from vendors. These retailers may be able to purchase branded merchandise that we cannot purchase because of their name recognition and relationships with suppliers, or they may be able to purchase branded merchandise with better pricing concessions than we receive. Our local and regional competitors have extensive knowledge of the consumer base and may be able to garner more loyalty from customers than we can. In addition, our online competitors enjoy a retailing advantage over us as we have only recently completed the upgrade of our website to enable Internet sales of selected urban branded apparel provided by third parties. If the consumer base we serve is satisfied with the selection, quality and price of our competitors’ products, consumers may decide not to shop in our stores. Additionally, if our existing competitors or other retailers decide to focus more on our core customers, particularly African-Americans consumers, we may have greater difficulty in competing effectively, our business and results of operations could be adversely affected, and the market price of our common stock could suffer.
The retail industry periodically has experienced consolidation and other ownership changes. In the future, other United States or foreign retailers may consolidate, undergo restructurings or reorganizations, or realign their affiliations. Any of these developments could result in our competitors increasing their buying power or market

6


Table of Contents

visibility. These developments may cause us to lose market share and could have a material adverse effect on our sales, revenues and results of operations.
We could experience a reduction in sales and revenues or reduced cash flows if we are unable to fulfill our current and future merchandising needs.
We depend on our suppliers for the continued availability and satisfactory quality of our merchandise. Most of our suppliers could discontinue selling to us at any time. Additionally, if the manufacturers or other owners of brands or trademarks terminate the license agreements under which some of our suppliers sell us products, we may be unable to obtain replacement merchandise of comparable fashion appeal or quality, in the same quantities or at the same prices. If we lose the services of one or more of our significant suppliers or one or more of them fail to meet our merchandising needs, we may be unable to obtain replacement merchandise in a timely manner. If our existing suppliers cannot meet our increased needs and we cannot locate alternative supply sources, we may be unable to obtain sufficient quantities of the most popular items of the nationally recognized brands at attractive prices, which could negatively impact our sales, revenues and results of operations.
As an apparel retailer, we rely on numerous third-parties in the supply chain to produce and deliver the products that we sell, and our business may be negatively impacted by their failure to comply with applicable law.
As an importer and retailer of goods, we rely on numerous third-parties to supply the products that we sell. Violations of law by our importers, buying agents, manufacturers or distributors could result in delays in shipments and receipt of goods and could subject us to fines or other penalties, any of which could restrict our business activities, increase our operating expenses or cause our revenues to decline. Further, we are susceptible to the receipt of counterfeit brands or unlicensed goods. We could incur liability with manufacturers or other owners of the brands or trademarked products if we inadvertently receive and sell counterfeit brands or unlicensed goods. It is important that we establish relationships with reputable vendors to prevent the possibility that we inadvertently receive counterfeit brands or unlicensed goods. Although we have a quality assurance team to check merchandise in an effort to assure that we purchase only authentic brands and licensed goods and are careful in selecting our vendors, we may receive products that we are prohibited from selling or incur liability for selling counterfeit brands or unlicensed goods, which could increase our operating expenses and cause our net income to decline.
If our growth strategy is unsuccessful, our financial condition and results of operation could suffer and the market price of our common stock could decline.
Our ability to continue to increase our net sales and earnings depends, in large part, on opening new stores and operating our new and existing stores profitably. We opened 40 new stores in fiscal 2004 and 25 new stores in fiscal 2003, and we intend to open 40 new stores in each of fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2006. If we are unable to open all of these stores or operate them profitability, we may not achieve our forecasted sales and earnings growth targets. This could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operation as well as cause a significant decline in the market price of our common stock.
The success of our growth strategy is dependent upon, among other things:
  •   identifying suitable markets and sites within those markets for new store locations and negotiating acceptable lease terms for new store locations;
 
  •   hiring, training and retaining competent sales and store management personnel;
 
  •   obtaining adequate capital;
 
  •   effectively managing higher levels of inventory to meet the needs of new and existing stores on a timely basis;
 
  •   maintaining a merchandise mix that appeals to cultural and fashion preferences and/or climate differences in new markets that are different from those in our existing markets;
 
  •   maintaining the appropriate proportion of new stores to existing stores in a particular market so that sales at existing stores do not decline due to a lack of new customers and a dispersion of existing customers;

7


Table of Contents

  •   fostering existing and new relationships with suppliers capable of providing us with a sufficient amount of merchandise to meet our growing needs as we increase the number of our stores;
 
  •   successfully integrating the new stores into our existing operations and expanding our infrastructure to accommodate our growing number of stores; and
 
  •   developing and operating additional distribution capacity as we increase the number of stores.
Growth of our store base will place increased demands on our operating, managerial and administrative resources and may lead to management and operating inefficiencies. These demands and inefficiencies may cause deterioration in the financial performance of our individual stores and, therefore, our entire business.
We could experience increased operating costs and limited amounts of growth if we are unable to obtain reasonably priced financing.
We may need to raise additional debt or equity capital in the future to open new stores, to respond to competitive pressures or to respond to unforeseen financial requirements. We may not be able to obtain additional capital on commercially reasonable terms or at all. Our inability to obtain reasonably priced financing could create increased operating costs and diminished levels of growth, as we could be forced to incur indebtedness with above-market interest rates or with substantial restrictive covenants, issue equity securities that dilute the ownership interests of existing stockholders or scale back our operations and/or store growth strategy.
A significant disruption to our distribution process or southeastern retail locations could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
Our ability to distribute merchandise to our store locations in a timely manner is essential to the efficient and profitable operation of our business. At the center of our distribution process are our two distribution centers located in Savannah, Georgia, one of which also serves as our corporate headquarters. Any natural disaster or other disruption to the operation of either of these facilities due to fire, hurricane, other natural disaster or any other cause could damage a significant portion of our inventory or impair our ability to stock adequately our stores and process product returns to suppliers.
In addition, Savannah, Georgia and the southeastern United States are vulnerable to significant damage or destruction from hurricanes and tropical storms. Although we maintain insurance on our stores and other facilities, the economic effects of a natural disaster that affects our distribution centers and/or a significant number of our stores could increase our operating expenses, impair our cash flows and reduce our revenues, which could negatively impact the market price of our common stock.
Our growth strategy requires that we expand our distribution capacity, and, in the event that we are unable to find a suitable location for such a facility, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be materially adversely affected.
We will need additional distribution capacity in the next two to three years to support our anticipated growth. Although we currently intend to acquire or design and construct a new distribution center during this time period, there is no assurance that we will be able to acquire or design and construct such a center in a cost efficient manner. In order to maintain the efficient operation of our business, additional centers may need to be located in closer proximity to the new markets that we enter. In addition, we may have difficulty finding suitable locations for new distribution centers, and, if we do, they may be more expensive to operate than our existing facilities. Our failure to expand our distribution capacity on a timely basis to keep pace with our anticipated growth in stores could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
Our net sales, inventory levels and earnings fluctuate on a seasonal basis, which makes our business more susceptible to adverse events that occur during those seasons.
Our net sales and earnings are disproportionately higher during the first and fourth quarters each year due to the importance of the spring selling season, which includes Easter, and the fall selling season, which includes Christmas. Factors negatively affecting us during the first and fourth quarters, including adverse weather and unfavorable

8


Table of Contents

economic conditions, will have a greater adverse effect on our financial condition than if our business were less seasonal.
In order to prepare for the spring and fall selling seasons, we must order and keep in stock significantly more merchandise than during other parts of the year. This seasonality makes our business more susceptible to the risk that our inventory will not satisfy actual consumer demand. Any unanticipated demand imbalances during these peak shopping seasons could require us either to sell excess inventory at a substantial markdown or fail to satisfy our consumers. In either event, our net sales and gross margins may be lower than historical levels, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
We experience fluctuations and variability in our comparable store sales and quarterly results of operations and, as a result, the market price of our common stock may fluctuate or decline substantially.
Our comparable store sales and quarterly results have fluctuated significantly in the past, and we expect them to continue to fluctuate in the future. Since the beginning of fiscal 2003, our quarter-to-quarter comparable store sales have ranged from an increase of 0.3% to an increase of 8.9%. This variability could cause our comparable store sales and quarterly results to fall below the expectations of securities analysts or investors which could result in volatility of the market price of our common stock. Our comparable store sales and quarterly results of operations are affected by a variety of factors, including:
  •   fashion trends, including consumer response to new and existing styles;
 
  •   seasonal demand for apparel;
 
  •   calendar shifts of holidays;
 
  •   our merchandise mix and the gross margins we achieve on the various merchandise we sell;
 
  •   our ability to source, manage and distribute merchandise effectively;
 
  •   changes in general economic conditions, the retail sales environment and consumer spending patterns;
 
  •   weather conditions, natural disasters, acts of war or terrorism and other events outside of our control;
 
  •   actions of our competitors or anchor tenants in the strip shopping centers where our stores are located;
 
  •   the timing and effectiveness of our advertising and other marketing campaigns;
 
  •   the level of pre-opening expenses associated with new stores; and
 
  •   the timing of new store openings and the relative proportion of new stores to existing stores.
We may be unable to maintain historical levels of comparable store sales as we execute our growth strategy and expand our business. If our comparable store sales and quarterly results fail to meet the expectations of the market generally, the market price of our common stock could decline substantially.
Our sales and revenues could decline as a result of general economic and other factors outside of our control, such as changes in consumer spending patterns and declines in employment levels.
Downturns, or the expectation of a downturn, in general economic conditions could adversely affect consumer spending patterns, our sales and our results of operations. Because apparel generally is a discretionary purchase, declines in consumer spending patterns may have a more negative effect on apparel retailers than some other retailers. Therefore, we may not be able to maintain our historical rate of growth in revenues and earnings, or remain as profitable, if there is a decline in consumer spending patterns. In addition, since the majority of our stores are located in the southeastern United States, our operations are more susceptible to regional factors than the operations of our more geographically diversified competitors. Therefore, any adverse economic conditions that have a disproportionate effect on the southeastern United States could have a greater negative effect on our sales, revenues and results of operations than on retailers with a more geographically diversified store base.

9


Table of Contents

Our failure to protect our trademarks could have a negative effect on our brand image and limit our ability to penetrate new markets.
We believe that our “Citi Trends” trademark is integral to our store design and our success in building consumer loyalty to our brand. We have registered this trademark with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office. We have also registered, or applied for registration of, additional trademarks with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office that we believe are important to our business. We cannot assure you that these registrations will prevent imitation of our name, merchandising concept, store design or private label merchandise or the infringement of our other intellectual property rights by others. Imitation of our name, concept, store design or merchandise in a manner that projects lesser quality or carries a negative connotation of our brand image could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
In addition, we cannot assure you that others will not try to block the manufacture or sale of our private label merchandise by claiming that our merchandise violates their trademarks or other proprietary rights since other entities may have rights to trademarks that contain the word “Citi” or may have rights in similar or competing marks for apparel and/ or accessories. Although we cannot currently estimate the likelihood of success of any such lawsuit or ultimate resolution of such a conflict, such a controversy could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
Our failure to implement and maintain effective internal controls in our business could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition, results of operations and stock price.
We are in the process of documenting and testing our internal control procedures in order to satisfy the requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. Section 404 requires annual management assessments of the effectiveness of our internal controls over financial reporting and a report by our independent auditors addressing these assessments. We will be required to comply with Section 404 no later than the time we file our annual report for fiscal 2006 with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the Commission. During the course of our testing, we may identify deficiencies in our internal controls, which we may be unable to correct in time to meet the deadline imposed by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. If we fail to achieve and maintain the adequacy of our internal controls in accordance with applicable standards as then in effect supplemented or amended from time to time, we may be unable to conclude on an ongoing basis that we have effective internal controls over financial reporting in accordance with Section 404. Moreover, effective internal controls, particularly those related to revenue recognition, are necessary for us to produce reliable financial reports and are important in our effort to prevent financial fraud. If we cannot produce reliable financial reports or prevent fraud, our business, financial condition and results of operations could be harmed, investors could lose confidence in our reported financial information, the market price of our stock could decline significantly and we may be unable to obtain additional financing to operate and expand our business.
Adverse trade restrictions may disrupt our supply of merchandise. We also face various risks because much of our merchandise is imported from abroad.
We purchase the products we sell directly from over 1,000 vendors, and a substantial portion of this merchandise is manufactured outside of the United States and imported by our vendors from countries such as China and other areas of the Far East, including Taiwan and the Philippines. The countries in which our merchandise currently is manufactured or may be manufactured in the future could become subject to new trade restrictions imposed by the United States or other foreign governments. Trade restrictions, including increased tariffs or quotas, embargoes, and customs restrictions, against apparel items, as well as United States or foreign labor strikes, work stoppages or boycotts, could increase the cost or reduce the supply of apparel available to us and have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, our merchandise supply could be impacted if our vendors’ imports become subject to existing or future duties and quotas, or if our vendors face increased competition from other companies for production facilities, import quota capacity and shipping capacity.
We also face a variety of other risks generally associated with relying on vendors that do business in foreign markets and import merchandise from abroad, such as:
  •   political instability or the threat of terrorism, in particular in countries where our vendors source merchandise such as Taiwan and the Philippines;
 
  •   enhanced security measures at United States and foreign ports, which could delay delivery of imports;

10


Table of Contents

  •   imposition of new or supplemental duties, taxes, and other charges on imports;
 
  •   delayed receipt or non-delivery of goods due to the failure of foreign-source suppliers to comply with applicable import regulations;
 
  •   delayed receipt or non-delivery of goods due to organized labor strikes or unexpected or significant port congestion at United States ports; and
 
  •   local business practice and political issues, including issues relating to compliance with domestic or international labor standards which may result in adverse publicity.
The United States may impose new initiatives that adversely affect the trading status of countries where apparel is manufactured. These initiatives may include retaliatory duties or other trade sanctions that, if enacted, would increase the cost of products imported from countries where our vendors acquire merchandise. Any of these factors could have a material adverse effect on our sales, revenues and result of operations.
The removal of import quotas on textiles and clothing may adversely affect our merchandise supply, impact our sales and reduce our cash flows.
On January 1, 2005, in accordance with the World Trade Organization, or the WTO, Agreement on Textiles and Clothing, the import quotas on textiles and clothing manufactured by countries that are members of the WTO were eliminated. While the exact impact of this quota removal is uncertain, the increased access to foreign textile markets could result in a surge of imported goods from countries that benefit from the removal of the quotas which, in turn, could create logistical delays in our ability to maintain required inventory levels. In addition, the quota removal may alter the cost differential between vendors that source domestically and vendors that source more extensively from overseas. We believe this could lower the cost of apparel products and thereby reduce our average dollar amount of sales per customer in our stores. Further, a number of actions have been taken or threatened by parties affected by the removal of the quotas, including domestic producers and foreign countries that allege they will be unfairly competitively harmed by the removal of the quotas on goods manufactured in larger countries. These actions may disrupt the supply chain of products from foreign markets or make it difficult to predict accurately the prices of merchandise to be imported from a particular country. The outcome of these actions or other trade disruptions may have an adverse effect on our merchandise supply, sales and cash flows.
We depend on the experience and expertise of our senior management team and key employees, and the loss of the services of Mr. Anderson or Mr. Bellino could have a material adverse effect on our business strategy, operating costs, financial condition and results of operations.
The success of our business is dependent upon the close supervision of all aspects of our business by our senior management, particularly the operation of our stores, the selection of our merchandise and the site selection for new stores. If we lose the services of R. Edward Anderson, our Chief Executive Officer, or George Bellino, our President and Chief Merchandising Officer, our business could be adversely affected.
Like most retailers, we experience significant employee turnover rates, particularly among store sales associates and managers, and our continued growth will require us to hire and train even more new personnel. We therefore must continually attract, hire and train new personnel to meet our staffing needs. We constantly compete for qualified personnel with companies in our industry and in other industries. A significant increase in the turnover rate among our store sales associates and managers would increase our recruiting and training costs and could decrease our operating efficiency and productivity. If we are unable to retain our key employees or attract, train, assimilate or retain other skilled personnel in the future, we may not be able to service our customers as effectively, thus reducing our ability to continue our growth and to operate our existing stores as profitably as we have in the past.
Increases in the minimum wage could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
From time to time, legislative proposals are made to increase the minimum wage in the United States, as well as certain individual states. Wage rates for many of our employees are at or slightly above the minimum wage. As federal and/or state minimum wage rates increase, we may need to increase not only the wage rates of our minimum

11


Table of Contents

wage employees but the wages paid to our other hourly employees as well. Any increase in the cost of our labor could have a material adverse effect on our operating costs, financial condition and results of operations.
We are subject to various legal proceedings, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations, if the outcome of such proceedings are adverse to us.
We are from time to time involved in various legal proceedings incidental to the conduct of our business. Such claims may be made by our customers, employees or former employees. We are currently the defendant in two putative collective action lawsuits commenced by former employees under the Fair Labor Standards Act. The plaintiff in each of the lawsuits is represented by the same law firm, and both suits are pending in District Court of the United States for the Middle District of Alabama, Northern Division. Each of the cases is in its early stages, and we are in the process of evaluating the claims made. Our review of the allegations is preliminary, and we plan to defend these suits vigorously. If these legal proceedings are adversely decided, they could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
Any failure of our management information systems or the inability of third parties to continue to upgrade and maintain the systems could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
We depend on the accuracy, reliability and proper functioning of our management information systems, including systems used to track our sales and facilitate inventory management. We also rely on our management information systems for merchandise planning, replenishment and markdowns, and other key business functions. These functions enhance our ability to optimize sales while limiting markdowns and reducing inventory risk through properly marking down slow-selling styles, reordering existing styles and effectively distributing new inventory to our stores. We do not currently have redundant systems for all functions performed by our management information systems. Any interruption in these systems could impair our ability to manage our inventory effectively, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. To support our growth, we will need to expand our management information systems, and our failure to link and maintain these systems adequately could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
We depend on third-party suppliers to maintain and periodically upgrade our management information systems, including the software programs supporting our inventory management functions. This software is licensed to us by third-party suppliers. If any of these suppliers is unable to continue to maintain and upgrade these software programs and if we are unable to convert to alternate systems in an efficient and timely manner, it could result in a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.
Our ability to attract consumers to our stores depends on the success of the strip shopping centers and downtown business districts where our stores are located.
We locate our stores in strip shopping centers, street front locations and downtown business districts where we believe our consumers and potential consumers shop. The success of an individual store can depend on favorable placement within a given strip shopping center or business district. We cannot control the development of alternative shopping destinations near our existing stores or the availability or cost of real estate within existing or new shopping destinations. If our store locations fail to attract sufficient consumer traffic or we are unable to locate replacement locations on terms acceptable to us, our business, results of operations, and financial condition could suffer. If one or more of the anchor tenants located in the strip shopping centers or business districts where our stores are located close or leave, or if there is significant deterioration of the surrounding areas in which our stores are located, our business, results of operations and financial condition may be adversely affected.
Risks Relating to this Offering of Common Stock
Our stock price may be volatile, and you may lose all or a part of your investment.
Prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock, and an active market for our shares may not develop or be sustained after this offering. The initial public offering price for our common stock will be determined by negotiations between us and the underwriters and may not be representative of the price that will

12


Table of Contents

prevail in the open market. The market price of our common stock may be subject to significant fluctuations after our initial public offering. It is possible that in some future periods, our results of operations may be below the expectations of investors and any securities analysts that choose to follow our common stock. If our results of operations fall below expectations of securities analysts or investors, the market price of our common stock could fluctuate or decline substantially. Factors that could affect our stock price include the following:
  •   actual or anticipated fluctuations in our operating results;
 
  •   changes in securities analysts’ recommendations or estimates of our financial performance;
 
  •   publication of research reports by analysts;
 
  •   changes in market valuations of companies similar to ours;
 
  •   announcements by us, our competitors or other retailers;
 
  •   the trading volume of our common stock in the public market;
 
  •   changes in economic conditions;
 
  •   financial market conditions; and
 
  •   the realization of some or all of the risks described in this section entitled “Risk Factors.”
In addition, the stock markets have experienced significant price and trading volume fluctuations from time to time, and the market prices of the equity securities of retailers have been extremely volatile and have recently experienced sharp price and trading volume changes. These broad market fluctuations may adversely affect the market price of our common stock.
As a new investor, you will incur substantial dilution as a result of this offering.
The initial public offering price will be substantially higher than the pro forma net tangible book value per share of our outstanding common stock. As a result, investors purchasing common stock in this offering will incur immediate dilution of $           per share in pro forma net tangible book value. See the information in the section entitled “Dilution.” This dilution is due primarily to earlier investors in our company having paid substantially less than the initial public offering price when they purchased their shares and to the deduction of the $          in underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us.
There may be sales of substantial amounts of our common stock after this offering, which could cause our stock price to fall.
Our current stockholders hold a substantial number of shares that they will be able to sell in the public market in the near future. Upon the consummation of this offering, shares of our common stock will be outstanding. As of                     , 2005, additional shares of our common stock were subject to outstanding stock options. All of the shares sold in this offering will be freely tradable, except for any shares acquired by holders who are subject to market stand-off provisions or lock-up agreements entered into in connection with this offering, or by any of our “affiliates,” as that term is defined in Rule 144 promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, which generally includes officers, directors and 10% or greater stockholders. Sales of a significant portion of the shares of our common stock outstanding after this offering will continue to be restricted as a result of securities laws or contractual arrangements, including lock-up agreements entered into between our directors and officers and the representatives of the underwriters in this offering. These lock-up agreements restrict holders’ ability to transfer their stock for 180 days after the date of this prospectus. Of the outstanding restricted shares, will be available for sale in the public market beginning 90 days after the consummation of this offering, and will be available for sale in the public market 180 days after the date of this prospectus. The managing underwriter may, however, waive the lock-up period at any time for any stockholder who is party to a lockup agreement. In addition, following consummation of this offering, Hampshire Equity Partners will have certain registration rights related to shares of our common stock held by it. Sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock after this offering, or after the expiration of applicable lock-up periods, could cause our stock price to fall and/or impair our ability to raise capital through the sale of additional stock.

13


Table of Contents

After this offering, a significant amount of our common stock will be concentrated in the hands of one of our existing stockholders whose interests may not coincide with yours.
Upon the completion of this offering, Hampshire Equity Partners will own approximately      % of our common stock, or approximately      % if the over-allotment option is exercised in full. As a result, Hampshire Equity Partners will continue to have an ability to exercise control over matters requiring stockholder approval. These matters include the election of directors and the approval of significant corporate transactions, including potential mergers, consolidations or sales of all or substantially all of our assets. Immediately following the consummation of this offering, Hampshire Equity Partners will have one representative, our current Chairman of the Board, on our five member board of directors. In connection with this offering, we will enter into a nominating agreement with Hampshire Equity Partners pursuant to which we, acting through our nominating and corporate governance committee, will agree, subject to the requirements of our directors’ fiduciary duties, that (i) Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to designate two directors to be nominated for election to our board of directors as long as Hampshire Equity Partners owns in the aggregate at least 40% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering or (ii) Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to designate one director to be nominated for election to our board of directors as long as Hampshire Equity Partners owns in the aggregate less than 40% and at least 15% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering. If at any time Hampshire Equity Partners owns less than 15% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering, it will not have the right to nominate any directors for election to our board of directors. Your interests as a holder of the common stock may differ from the interests of Hampshire Equity Partners.
We will have broad discretion in how we use the proceeds of this offering, and we may not use these proceeds effectively.
We will have considerable discretion in how we use the net proceeds from this offering. We currently intend to use the net proceeds to redeem all of our Series A Preferred Stock and to pay all accrued and unpaid dividends thereon, to repay all indebtedness under the mortgage on our Fahm Street facility and under our existing revolving lines of credit, for new store openings, for the acquisition or design and construction of a new distribution center and for general corporate purposes. See the information in the section entitled “Use of Proceeds.” We have not yet finalized the amount of net proceeds that we will use specifically for each of these purposes, other than the redemption of our Series A Preferred Stock. While we intend to use the net proceeds of the offering as described in the “Use of Proceeds” section of this prospectus, we will have broad discretion to adjust the application and allocation of the net proceeds in order to address changed circumstances and opportunities. We may use the net proceeds for corporate purposes that do not improve our operating results or yield a significant return for our stockholders.
Securities analysts may not initiate coverage of our common stock, or, if they do, they may issue negative reports that adversely affect the price of our common stock.
The trading market for our common stock will depend in part on the research and reports that industry or financial analysts publish about us or our industry. In the event that our common stock receives research coverage, public statements by these securities analysts may affect our stock price. If any of the analysts who cover our company downgrades the rating of our common stock, our common stock price would likely decline. If any of these analysts ceases coverage of our company, we could lose visibility in the market, which in turn could cause our common stock price to decline. Further, if no analysts choose to cover our company, the lack of research coverage may depress the market price of our common stock.
In addition, recently-adopted rules mandated by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and a global settlement with the Commission have caused a number of fundamental changes in how securities analysts are reviewed and compensated. In particular, many investment banking firms are now required to contract with independent financial analysts for their stock research. In this environment, it may be difficult for companies with smaller market capitalizations, such as our company, to attract independent financial analysts to cover them, which could have a negative effect on the market price of our common stock.

14


Table of Contents

We do not currently intend to pay dividends on our common stock.
We have never declared or paid any cash dividends on our common stock and do not currently intend to do so for the foreseeable future. We currently intend to invest our future earnings, if any, to fund our growth. Therefore, you are not likely to receive any dividends on your common stock for the foreseeable future.
Provisions in our certificate of incorporation and by-laws and Delaware law may delay or prevent our acquisition by a third party.
Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws contain several provisions that may make it more difficult for a third party to acquire control of us without the approval of our board of directors. These provisions include, among other things, a classified board of directors, advance notice for raising business or making nominations at stockholder meetings and “blank check” preferred stock. Blank check preferred stock enables our board of directors, without stockholder approval, to designate and issue additional series of preferred stock with such dividend, liquidation, conversion, voting or other rights, including convertible securities with no limitations on conversion, as our board of directors may determine, including rights to dividends and proceeds in a liquidation that are senior to the common stock.
We are also subject to several provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law that could delay, prevent or deter a merger, acquisition, tender offer, proxy contest or other transaction that might otherwise result in our stockholders receiving a premium over the market price for their common stock or may otherwise be in the best interests of our stockholders. You should refer to the section entitled “Description of Capital Stock” for more information.

15


Table of Contents

Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements
We have made forward-looking statements in this prospectus, including in the sections entitled “Prospectus Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation” and “Business.” All statements other than historical facts contained in this prospectus, including statements regarding our future financial position, business policy and plans and objectives of management for future operations, are forward-looking statements. The words “believe,” “may,” “could,” “estimate,” “continue,” “anticipate,” “intend,” “expect” and similar expressions, as they relate to us, are intended to identify forward-looking statements. For example, our statements to the effect that we intend to open a specified number of new stores, that we intend to increase comparable store sales, and that we intend to achieve a specified return on invested capital constitute forward-looking statements. We have based these forward-looking statements largely on our current expectations and projections about future events, including, among other things:
  •   implementation of our growth strategy;
 
  •   our ability to anticipate and respond to fashion trends;
 
  •   competition in our markets;
 
  •   consumer spending patterns;
 
  •   actions of our competitors or anchor tenants in the strip shopping centers where our stores are located;
 
  •   anticipated fluctuations in our operating results; and
 
  •   economic conditions in general.
These forward-looking statements are subject to a number of risks, uncertainties and assumptions described in the section entitled “Risk Factors” and elsewhere in this prospectus.
Because forward-looking statements are inherently subject to risks and uncertainties, some of which cannot be predicted or quantified, you should not rely upon forward-looking statements as predictions of future events. The events and circumstances reflected in the forward-looking statements may not be achieved or occur and actual results could differ materially from those projected in the forward-looking statements. Except as required by applicable law, including the securities laws of the United States and the rules and regulations of the Commission, we do not plan to publicly update or revise any forward-looking statements contained herein after we distribute this prospectus, whether as a result of any new information, future events or otherwise.

16


Table of Contents

Use of Proceeds
We estimate that we will receive net proceeds from this offering of approximately $           million, at an assumed initial public offering price of $           per share, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us. If the underwriters exercise their over-allotment option in full, we estimate that we will receive additional net proceeds of approximately $           million. We will not receive any of the proceeds from the sale of shares of common stock offered by the selling stockholders.
We intend to use the net proceeds from this offering as follows:
  •   approximately $3.5 million to redeem all of our outstanding Series A Preferred Stock and to pay all accrued and unpaid dividends thereon;
 
  •   approximately $1.6 million to repay all outstanding indebtedness under the loan from National Bank of Commerce to us, which is secured by our Savannah, Georgia headquarters, bears interest at a fixed rate of 6.80% and matures on July 12, 2007;
 
  •   to repay all outstanding indebtedness under our $3.0 million revolving line of credit with Bank of America that, as of January 29, 2005, bears interest at a rate of 4.56% per annum;
 
  •   to repay all outstanding indebtedness under our $25.0 million revolving line of credit with Congress Financial that, as of January 29, 2005, bears interest at a rate of 5.25% per annum; and
 
  •   any remaining net proceeds for new store openings, the acquisition or design and construction of a new distribution center in fiscal 2006 and general corporate purposes.
Dividend Policy
We have never declared or paid any dividends on our common stock and do not intend to pay any dividends on our common stock in the foreseeable future. We currently intend to retain any future earnings to finance the expansion of our business and for general corporate purposes. Our board of directors has the authority to declare and pay dividends on our common stock, in its discretion, so long as there are funds legally available to do so.

17


Table of Contents

Capitalization
The table below sets forth the following information as of January 29, 2005:
  •   on an actual basis; and
 
  •   as adjusted to give effect to (a) the sale by us of shares of common stock in this offering, (b) the receipt and application of net proceeds of $      million, after deducting estimated underwriting discounts and commissions and estimated offering expenses payable by us, and the repayment of indebtedness described under the section entitled “Use of Proceeds” and (c) the filing of our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation upon consummation of this offering.
                       
    As of January 29, 2005
     
    Actual   As Adjusted
         
    (in thousands, except share and per
    share amounts)
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 11,801     $    
                 
Long-term debt (including current portion)
  $ 1,605     $ -  
Capital lease obligations (including current portion)
  $ 1,407     $    
Preferred shares subject to mandatory redemption:
               
  Series A preferred stock, $.01 par value per share, 3,500 shares authorized, issued and outstanding, actual; none authorized, issued or outstanding, as adjusted(1)     3,985       -  
Stockholders’ equity:
               
 
Common stock, $.01 par value per share,            shares authorized,            issued and outstanding, actual;            issued or outstanding, as adjusted
    4          
 
Preferred stock, $.01 par value per share, none authorized, issued or outstanding, actual;      authorized, none issued or outstanding, as adjusted
    -       -  
 
Additional paid-in capital
    4,121          
 
Subscription receivable
    (24 )     -  
 
Retained earnings
    19,829          
 
Treasury stock
    (165 )        
                 
   
Total stockholders’ equity
    23,765          
                 
     
Total capitalization
  $ 30,762     $    
                 
 
(1) Our Series A Preferred Stock, which will be redeemed using a portion of the net proceeds from this offering, was reclassified as debt as of the second quarter of fiscal 2003, in accordance with SFAS No. 150.

18


Table of Contents

Dilution
Our net tangible book value as of January 29, 2005 was $      million, or $          per share of common stock. “Net tangible book value” is our total assets minus the sum of our liabilities and intangible assets. “Net tangible book value per share of common stock” is our net tangible book value divided by the total number of our shares of common stock outstanding.
After giving effect to adjustments related to this offering, our pro forma net tangible book value on January 29, 2005 would have been $           million, or $          per share of common stock. Adjustments to net tangible book value to arrive at pro forma net tangible book value per share include:
  •   an increase in our total assets to reflect the net proceeds from this offering (assuming an initial public offering price of $          per share); and
 
  •   the issuance of an additional                      shares of common stock in this offering.
The following table illustrates the pro forma increase in our net tangible book value of $           per share of common stock and the dilution of $           per share of common stock (the difference between the offering price per share and the net tangible book value per share after giving effect to this offering) to new investors:
           
Assumed initial public offering price per share of common stock
  $    
 
Pro forma net tangible book value per share of common stock as of January 29, 2005
  $    
 
Increase in net tangible book value per share of common stock attributable to this offering
  $    
Pro forma net tangible book value per share of common stock as of January 29, 2005 after giving effect to adjustments related to this offering
  $    
         
Dilution per share of common stock to new investors in this offering
  $   (1)
         
 
(1)  Assuming exercise of all exercisable options to purchase common stock outstanding as of             , 2005, the dilution per share of common stock to new investors in this offering would be $        .
The following table summarizes, on a pro forma basis as of January 29, 2005, the differences between the existing stockholders and new investors with respect to the number of shares of common stock sold by us, the total consideration paid to us and the average price paid per share. The table assumes that the initial public offering price will be $           per share of common stock.
                                           
    Share Purchased   Total Consideration    
            Average Price
    Number   Percent   Amount   Percent   Per Share
                     
Existing stockholders(1)
            %     $         %     $    
New investors
            %     $         %     $    
                                       
 
Totals
            %     $         %     $    
                                       
 
(1) Does not give effect to sales of shares by the selling stockholders in this offering.

19


Table of Contents

Selected Financial and Operating Data
The following table provides selected financial and operating data for each of the fiscal years in the five-year period ended January 29, 2005, including: (a) our statement of operations data for each such period, (b) additional operating data for each such period and (c) our balance sheet data as of the end of each such period. The statement of operations data for fiscal 2002, fiscal 2003 and fiscal 2004, and the balance sheet data as of January 31, 2004 and January 29, 2005 are derived from financial statements included elsewhere in this prospectus that have been audited by KPMG LLP, independent registered public accountants. The statement of operations data for fiscal 2000 and fiscal 2001 and the balance sheet data as of January 29, 2000, February 3, 2001, February 2, 2002 and February 1, 2003 are derived from our audited financial statements that are not included in this prospectus. The selected financial and operating data set forth below should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified in their entirety by reference to, the section of this prospectus entitled “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. Historical results are not necessarily indicative of results to be expected for any future period.
                                             
    Fiscal Year Ended(1)
     
    February 3,   February 2,   February 1,   January 31,   January 29,
    2001   2002   2003   2004   2005
                     
    (dollars in thousands, except per share amounts)
Statement of Operations Data:
                                       
 
Net sales
  $ 80,939     $ 97,933     $ 124,951     $ 157,198     $ 203,442  
 
Cost of sales
    51,762       62,050       77,807       98,145       127,308  
                                         
 
Gross profit
    29,177       35,883       47,144       59,053       76,134  
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    26,834       31,405       38,760       48,845       63,594  
                                         
 
Income from operations
    2,343       4,478       8,385       10,208       12,540  
 
Interest expense(2)
    787       455       256       563       732  
                                         
 
Income before income taxes
    1,556       4,023       8,129       9,645       11,808  
 
Income tax expense
    358       1,566       3,101       3,727       4,551  
                                         
 
Net income
  $ 1,198     $ 2,457     $ 5,028     $ 5,918     $ 7,257  
                                         
 
Net income per common share:
                                       
   
Basic
  $       $       $       $            
   
Diluted
  $       $       $       $            
 
Weighted average shares used to compute net income per share:
                                       
   
Basic
                                       
   
Diluted
                                       
Additional Operating Data:
                                       
 
Number of stores:
                                       
   
Opened during period
    23       12       16       25       40  
   
Closed during period
          4       2       1       1  
   
Open at end of period
    115       123       137       161       200  
 
Selling square footage at end of period
    786,534       891,843       1,043,713       1,290,039       1,715,943  
 
Comparable store sales increase(3)
    17.6%       6.5%       14.6%       5.5%       3.0%  
 
Average sales per store(4)
  $ 782     $ 818     $ 961     $ 1,055     $ 1,127  
(footnotes on following page)

20


Table of Contents

                                           
    Fiscal Year Ended(1)
     
    February 3,   February 2,   February 1,   January 31,   January 29,
    2001   2002   2003   2004   2005
                     
    (dollars in thousands)
Balance Sheet Data:
                                       
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 1,496     $ 4,098     $ 5,825     $ 9,954       11,801  
 
Total assets
    25,023       29,733       36,127       49,213       70,790  
 
Total liabilities
    17,404       19,489       20,693       32,709       47,025  
 
Total stockholders’ equity
    3,471       5,736       10,598       16,504       23,765  
 
(1)  Our fiscal year ends on the Saturday closest to January 31 of each year. Fiscal years 2001, 2002, 2003 and 2004 comprise 52 weeks. Fiscal year 2000 comprises 53 weeks.
 
(2)  Our Series A Preferred Stock, which will be redeemed using a portion of the net proceeds from this offering, was reclassified as debt as of the second quarter of fiscal 2003, in accordance with SFAS No. 150, Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities and Equity. The amount of dividends treated as interest expense in fiscal 2004 was $324,450, fiscal 2003 was $189,000 and none in fiscal 2002.
 
(3)  Stores included in the comparable store sales calculation for any period are those stores that were opened prior to the beginning of the preceding fiscal year and were still open at the end of such period. Relocated stores and expanded stores are included in the comparable store sales results.
 
(4)  Average sales per store is defined as net sales divided by the average of stores open at the end of the prior period and stores open at the end of the current period.

21


Table of Contents

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations
You should read the following discussion and analysis of our financial condition and results of operations in conjunction with the section entitled “Selected Financial and Operating Data” and our financial statements and related notes included elsewhere in this prospectus. This discussion may contain forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. As a result of many factors, such as those set forth under the sections entitled “Risk Factors” and “Special Note Regarding Forward-Looking Statements” and elsewhere in this prospectus, our actual results may differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements.
Overview
We are a rapidly growing, value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories for the entire family. Our merchandise offerings are designed to appeal to the preferences of fashion conscious consumers, particularly African-Americans. Originally our stores were located in the Southeast, and we have recently expanded into the Mid-Atlantic region and Texas. We currently operate 208 stores in both urban and rural markets in 12 states.
Our predecessor was founded in 1946 and grew to become a chain of family apparel stores operating in the Southeast under the Allied Department Stores name. In 1999, our chain of stores was acquired by Hampshire Equity Partners, a private equity firm. Since the acquisition, our management team has implemented a focused merchandising and operating model to differentiate our stores and serve our core customers more effectively. Specifically, we concentrated the merchandise offerings on more urban fashion apparel for the entire family and increased the offering of nationally recognized brands. We also accelerated a remodeling campaign to upgrade the acquired store base and create a more appealing shopping environment in our stores. By the end of fiscal 2003, virtually all of the acquired stores had been remodeled and, in some cases, expanded. These initiatives resulted in gains in comparable store sales. More recently, the pace of our comparable store sales gains has moderated as the revamping of our existing store base has been substantially completed. We expect that the impact of our remodel, relocate and expansion initiatives will be far less significant in the future and that the primary causes of any increased comparable store sales will result from merchandising enhancements or the expansion of certain product categories, such as home decor and intimate apparel.
We have implemented an aggressive store growth strategy and believe that the addition of new stores will be the primary source of future growth. In fiscal 2003 and 2004, we opened 25 and 40 stores, respectively. During this period, we entered Houston, Norfolk and, most recently, the Baltimore and Washington, D.C. markets, where we opened a total of 15 new stores. In each of fiscal 2005 and 2006, we intend to open 40 new stores, approximately 70% of which are expected to be located in states that we currently serve.
Our new store expansion is fueled by store economics that we believe to be very attractive. From an investment perspective, we seek to design stores that are inviting and easy to shop, while limiting start up and fixturing costs. We also have relatively low store operating costs. Our real estate approach is focused on strip shopping center sites within low to moderate income neighborhoods, and we generally utilize previously occupied store sites rather than newly constructed sites. As a result, we are usually able to secure sites with substantial customer traffic at attractive lease terms. Our ongoing advertising expenses are also low, with a significant amount of advertising focused on new store openings.
Our stores generate rapid payback of investment. The average investment for the 41 stores opened in fiscal 2002 and fiscal 2003, including leasehold improvements, equipment, fixturing, cost of inventory to stock the store (net of accounts payables), and pre-opening store expenses, was approximately $240,000. These 41 stores generated average sales of $1.2 million and average store operating profit (defined as store operating revenues less cost of sales and store operating expenses) of approximately $190,000 during their first 12 months of operation. Our average investment for the 40 stores opened in fiscal 2004 was approximately $280,000. This investment represents an increase over prior years as the size of our stores has increased and we have assumed a larger portion of the costs associated with leasehold improvements in our stores, which we expect to recover over time. We expect that the stores opened in fiscal 2004 will achieve similar levels of return on investment.
We measure our performance using key operating statistics. One of our main performance measures is comparable store sales growth. We define a comparable store as a store that has been open for an entire fiscal year. Therefore,

22


Table of Contents

a store will not be considered a comparable store until its 13th month of operation at the earliest or its 24th month at the latest. As an example, all stores opened in fiscal 2002 and fiscal 2003 were not considered comparable stores in fiscal 2003. Relocated and expanded stores are included in the comparable store sales results. We also use other operating statistics, most notably average sales per store. As we typically occupy existing footprints in established shopping centers rather than sites built specifically for our stores, our store square footage (and therefore sales per square foot) vary by store. We focus on the overall store sales volume as the critical driver of profitability. Our average sales per store has increased as we have driven comparable store sales and opened new stores which are generally larger than our existing stores. Our average sales per store have increased from $0.7 million in fiscal 2000 to $1.1 million in fiscal 2004. Beyond sales, we measure gross margin percentage and store operating expenses, with a particular focus on labor as a percentage of sales. These results translate into store level contribution, which we use to evaluate overall performance of each individual store. Finally, we monitor corporate expenses in absolute amounts.
The new distribution center we opened in November 2004 increased our receiving and shipping capabilities in order to support the growth of our store base. The new center is located in the greater Savannah area and increases our total distribution space by approximately 60,000 square feet and our office space by approximately 10,000 square feet. We are leasing the center through September 2006 with options to renew for up to four additional years. We currently intend to acquire, lease or design and construct a new distribution center in fiscal 2006. We have hired a third party to conduct a site and feasibility study regarding the necessary size and location of the new distribution center. We expect to receive the results of the study in the near future, and we expect that after receipt of the report, we will determine whether to construct, acquire or lease a new distribution center and will select a suitable location.
Our cash requirements are primarily for working capital, construction of new stores, remodeling of existing stores and improvements to our information systems. Historically we have met these cash requirements from cash flow from operations, short-term trade credit and borrowings under our revolving lines of credit, long-term debt and capital leases.
We may be affected by the phase out of quotas on textiles and clothing under the WTO Agreement on Textiles and Clothing as implemented on January 1, 1995. Under this agreement, the import quotas on textiles and clothing manufactured by countries that are members of the WTO were eliminated. While the impact of the quota removal is uncertain, the increased access to foreign textile markets could create logistical delays arising from a surge of imported goods from countries that benefit from the removal of the quotas. In addition, the quota removal may alter the cost differential between vendors that source primarily domestically and vendors that source more extensively from overseas. We believe this could significantly reduce the cost of apparel products and thereby reduce the average dollar amount of sales per customer spent in our stores. Various actions have been taken or threatened by parties affected by the removal of the quotas, including the filing of a petition on behalf of the U.S. textile and apparel industry with the U.S. government at the end of 2004 based upon the “threat” then posed by the removal of the quotas in January 2005. On April 4, 2005, the U.S. Department of Commerce initiated safeguard proceedings with respect to three products (cotton knit shirts and blouses, cotton trousers and cotton and man-made fiber underwear) to evaluate the effect of removal of the quotas and the necessity of any remedial action. Although no remedial action has yet been taken, we cannot accurately assess ultimate outcome of these actions at this time.
We are documenting and testing our internal control procedures in order to comply with the requirements of Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002. Section 404 requires annual management assessments of the effectiveness of our internal controls over financial reporting and a report by our independent auditors addressing these assessments. We must comply with Section 404 no later than the time we file our annual report for fiscal 2006 with the Securities and Exchange Commission. During this time period specific internal controls may be identified as being deficient. We anticipate retaining additional personnel to assist us in complying with our Section 404 obligations. We are currently evaluating whether such personnel will be retained as consultants or as our employees. We plan to remediate any identified deficiencies and comply with our Section 404 obligations before the deadline.

23


Table of Contents

Basis of the Presentation
Net sales consist of store sales, net of returns by customers, and layaway fees. Cost of sales consists of the cost of products we sell and associated freight costs. Selling, general and administrative expense is comprised of store costs, including salaries and store occupancy costs, handling costs, corporate and distribution center costs and advertising costs. We operate on a 52- or 53-week fiscal year, which ends on the Saturday closest to January 31. Each of our fiscal quarters consists of four 13-week periods, with an extra week added on to the fourth quarter every five to six years. Our last three fiscal years ended on February 1, 2003, January 31, 2004 and January 29, 2005 and each included 52 weeks.
Results of Operations
Net Sales and Additional Operating Data. The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, selected statement of income data expressed both in dollars and as a percent of net sales:
                                                 
    Fiscal Year Ended
     
    February 1,   January 31,   January 29,
    2003   2004   2005
             
    (dollars in thousands)
Statements of Income Data
                                               
Net sales
  $ 124,951       100.0 %   $ 157,198       100.0 %   $ 203,442       100.0 %
Cost of sales
    77,807       62.3       98,145       62.4       127,308       62.6  
                                                 
Gross profit
    47,144       37.7       59,053       37.6       76,134       37.4  
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    38,760       31.0       48,845       31.1       63,594       31.3  
                                                 
Income from operations
    8,385       6.7       10,208       6.5       12,540       6.1  
Interest expense
    256       0.2       563       0.4       732       0.3  
                                                 
Income before income taxes
    8,129       6.5       9,645       6.1       11,808       5.8  
Income tax expense
    3,101       2.5       3,727       2.4       4,551       2.2  
                                                 
Net income
  $ 5,028       4.0 %   $ 5,918       3.8 %     7,257       3.6 %
                                                 
The following table provides information, for the periods indicated, about the number of total stores open at the beginning of the period, stores opened and closed during each period and the total stores open at the end of each period and comparable store sales for the periods:
                         
    Fiscal Year Ended
     
    February 1,   January 31,   January 29,
    2003   2004   2005
             
Total stores open, beginning of period
    123       137       161  
New stores
    16       25       40  
Closed stores
    2       1       1  
                         
Total stores open, end of period
    137       161       200  
                         
Comparable store sales increase
    14.6 %     5.5 %     3.0 %
Fiscal 2004 Compared to Fiscal 2003
Net Sales. Net sales increased $46.2 million, or 29.4%, to $203.4 million for fiscal 2004 from $157.2 million for fiscal 2003. The increase resulted primarily from net sales of $63.2 million in fiscal 2004 from stores opened during fiscal 2004 and fiscal 2003 as compared to net sales of $20.9 million in fiscal 2003 from stores opened in fiscal 2003. In addition, the increase was due to a comparable store sales increase of $4.0 million, or 3.0%. The increase in comparable store sales resulted, in part, from an increase in the number of customer transactions and average items per sale, partially offset by a decrease in the average price of an item sold. Remodeled and relocated stores accounted for less of the growth of comparable store sales in fiscal 2004 (only about 0.3% of the 3% growth) due to fewer stores being relocated and remodeled during the year. We expect comparable store sales to grow by low single-digit increases during fiscal 2005.

24


Table of Contents

Gross Profit. Gross profit increased $17.1 million, or 28.9%, to $76.1 million for fiscal 2004 from $59.1 million for fiscal 2003. The increase resulted primarily from the operation of new stores opened in fiscal 2004 and the full period impact of new stores opened during fiscal 2003, partially offset by a decrease in gross profit margin. Gross profit as a percentage of sales was 37.4% for fiscal 2004 compared to 37.6% for fiscal 2003. Gross margins decreased as a result of higher inbound and outbound freight costs primarily due to fuel surcharges.
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses. Selling, general and administrative expenses increased $14.7 million, or 30.2%, to $63.6 million for fiscal 2004 from $48.8 million for fiscal 2003. This increase was caused primarily by store level, distribution and corporate costs associated with the growing store base and the full period impact of new stores opened in fiscal 2003. As a percentage of net sales, selling, general and administrative expenses increased to 31.3% for fiscal 2004 from 31.1% for fiscal 2003. The increase was partially driven by approximately $360,000 of additional vacation pay accrual pursuant to a change in the Company’s vacation policy.
Interest Expense. Interest expense increased $169,000 for fiscal 2004 to $732,000 compared to $563,000 for fiscal 2003. The increase was primarily the result of the adoption of SFAS No. 150, which increased interest expense by the inclusion of dividends on mandatory redeemable obligations that were previously deducted from equity as dividends, and increased borrowings related to the cost of new stores during the period, inclusive of inventory. We adopted SFAS No. 150 on July 6, 2003 and dividends treated as interest expense in fiscal 2004 and fiscal 2003 were approximately $324,000 and approximately $189,000, respectively.
Income Tax Expense. Income tax expense increased approximately $824,000 for fiscal 2004 to $4.6 million compared to $3.7 million for fiscal 2003. Our effective tax rate was 38.5% and 38.6% for fiscal 2004 and fiscal 2003, respectively.
Net Income. Net income increased to $7.3 million for fiscal 2004 from $5.9 million as a result of the factors discussed above.
Fiscal 2003 Compared to Fiscal 2002
Net Sales. Net sales increased $32.2 million, or 25.8%, to $157.2 million for fiscal 2003 from $125.0 million for fiscal 2002. The increase resulted primarily from net sales of $38.6 million in fiscal 2003 from stores opened during fiscal 2003 and fiscal 2002 as compared to net sales of $10.8 million in fiscal 2002 from stores opened in fiscal 2002. In addition, the increase was due to a comparable store sales increase of $6.1 million, or 5.5%. The increase in comparable store sales resulted, in part, from an increase in the number of customer transactions and average items per sale, partially offset by a decrease in average price of an item sold. In addition, in fiscal 2002, we took over shoe operations in our stores from a third party licensee that had previously managed the shoe merchandise and paid us a commission on sales. As a result of this purchase, we recognized shoe sales as part of net sales (amounting to $3.8 million in fiscal 2003) instead of recognizing only the commissions as an increase to operating income. The increase in comparable store sales in fiscal 2003 benefited from the full year impact of this change. The increase was also caused by the impact of increased sales from stores that were relocated and remodeled during the two-year period, with such stores accounting for approximately one-third of the 5.5% comparable store sales increase.
Gross Profit. Gross profit increased $11.9 million, or 25.3%, to $59.1 million for fiscal 2003 from $47.1 million for fiscal 2002. The increase resulted primarily from the operation of 25 new stores opened in fiscal 2003 and the full year impact of 16 new stores opened during fiscal 2002. Gross margin was 37.6% for fiscal 2003 compared to 37.7% for fiscal 2002. The decrease resulted from higher freight costs.
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses. Selling, general and administrative expenses increased $10.1 million, or 26.0%, to $48.8 million for fiscal 2003 from $38.8 million for fiscal 2002. As a percentage of net sales, selling, general and administrative expenses increased to 31.1% for fiscal 2003 from 31.0% for fiscal 2002. The dollar increase was caused primarily by increases in store level expenses, distribution costs and corporate costs associated with the growing store base and full period impact of new stores opened during fiscal 2002.

25


Table of Contents

Interest Expense. Interest expense increased approximately $307,000 for fiscal 2003 to approximately $563,000, compared to approximately $256,000 for fiscal 2002. The increase was primarily the result of our adoption of SFAS No. 150, which increased interest expense by the inclusion of dividends on mandatory redeemable obligations that were previously deducted from equity as dividends, increased borrowings related to the costs of opening new stores during the year, and the full year impact of the purchase of, and mortgage on, the office and distribution facility in Savannah, Georgia. The amount of dividends treated as interest expense in fiscal 2003 was approximately $189,000 and none in fiscal 2002.
Income Tax Expense. Income tax expense increased approximately $626,000 for fiscal 2003 to $3.7 million compared to $3.1 million for fiscal 2002. Our effective tax rate was 38.6% and 38.1% for fiscal 2003 and fiscal 2002, respectively. The rate increased in fiscal 2003 due to reclassifying nondeductible preferred stock dividends as interest expense with the adoption of SFAS No. 150 in July 2003.
Net Income. Net income increased to $5.9 million for fiscal 2003 from $5.0 million in fiscal 2002 as a result of the factors discussed above.
Fiscal 2002 Compared to Fiscal 2001
Net Sales. Net sales increased $27.1 million, or 27.6%, to $125.0 million for fiscal 2002 from $97.9 million for fiscal 2001. The increase resulted primarily from net sales of $24.8 million during fiscal 2002 from stores opened during fiscal 2002 and fiscal 2001 as compared to net sales of $9.1 million from stores opened in fiscal 2001. In addition, the increase was due to a comparable store sales increase of $13.0 million, or 14.6%. The increase in comparable store sales was caused in part by an increase in the number of customer transactions and average items per sale and to a lesser extent the relocating and remodeling of a number of stores.
Gross Profit. Gross profit increased $11.3 million, or 31.4%, to $47.1 million for fiscal 2002 from $35.9 million for fiscal 2001. The increase resulted primarily from the operation of 16 new stores opened in fiscal 2002 and the full year impact of 12 new stores opened during fiscal 2001. Gross margin was 37.7% for fiscal 2002 compared to 36.6% for fiscal 2001. The increase resulted from lower markdowns and inventory shrinkage.
Selling, General and Administrative Expenses. Selling, general and administrative expenses increased $7.4 million, or 23.4%, to $38.8 million for fiscal 2002 from $31.4 million for fiscal 2001. As a percentage of net sales, selling, general and administrative expenses decreased to 31.0% for fiscal 2002 from 32.1% for fiscal 2001. This decrease as a percentage of sales was caused primarily by benefits realized from higher comparable stores sales which provided greater operating efficiencies at store level.
Interest Expense. Interest expense decreased approximately $199,000 for fiscal 2002 to approximately $256,000, compared to approximately $455,000 for fiscal 2001. The decrease was primarily the result of improved results from operations and cash flow resulting in significantly lower monthly average line of credit balances.
Income Tax Expense. Income tax expense increased $1.5 million for fiscal 2002 to $3.1 million, compared to $1.6 million for fiscal 2001, as a result of improved profitability. Our effective tax rate was 38.1% and 38.9% for fiscal 2002 and fiscal 2001, respectively. The rate decreased in fiscal 2002 due to larger state and local tax credits.
Net Income. Net income increased to $5.0 million in fiscal 2002 from $2.5 million in fiscal 2001 as a result of the factors discussed above.
Quarterly Results of Operations
The following table sets forth our unaudited quarterly results of operations for fiscal 2003 and 2004. Each quarterly period presented below consists of 13 weeks, and the information includes our statement of operations data for each such period and additional operating data for each such period. In the opinion of management, these unaudited interim financial data have been prepared on the same basis as the audited financial statements and reflect all adjustments (consisting only of normal recurring adjustments) and fairly present the financial information disclosed for these periods. The interim financial data set forth below should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified in their entirety by reference to, the audited financial statements and related notes included

26


Table of Contents

elsewhere in this prospectus. The results of operations for historical periods are not necessarily indicative of results for any future period.
Due to the importance of the spring selling season, which includes Easter, and the fall selling season, which includes Christmas, the first and fourth fiscal quarters have historically contributed, and we expect they will continue to contribute, disproportionately to our profitability for our entire fiscal year. As a result, any factors negatively affecting us in any year during the first and fourth fiscal quarters, including adverse weather and unfavorable economic conditions, could have a material adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations for the entire year.
Our quarterly results of operations also may fluctuate based upon such factors as the timing of holiday seasons, the number and timing of new store openings, the amount of store preopening expenses, the amount of net sales contributed by new and existing stores, the mix of products sold, the timing and level of markdowns, store closings, remodels and relocations, competitive factors, weather and general economic conditions.
                                                                   
    Quarter Ended
     
    May 3,   Aug. 2,   Nov. 1,   Jan. 31,   May 1,   July 31,   Oct. 30,   Jan. 29,
    2003   2003   2003   2004   2004   2004   2004   2005
                                 
    (dollars in thousands)
Statement of Operations Data:
                                                               
 
Net sales
  $ 37,575     $ 34,209     $ 36,168     $ 49,246     $ 48,069     $ 43,011     $ 46,049     $ 66,313  
 
Cost of sales
    22,023       22,452       22,991       30,679       29,034       28,095       29,159       41,020  
                                                                 
 
Gross profit
    15,552       11,757       13,177       18,567       19,035       14,916       16,890       25,293  
 
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    11,719       11,655       12,558       12,913       15,221       14,806       16,413       17,154  
                                                                 
 
Income from operations
    3,833       102       619       5,654       3,814       110       477       8,139  
 
Interest expense
    57       98       160       248       173       176       208       175  
                                                                 
 
Earnings (loss) before income taxes
    3,776       4       459       5,406       3,641       (66 )     269       7,964  
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
    1,459       1       177       2,090       1,402       (25 )     104       3,070  
                                                                 
 
Net income (loss)
  $ 2,317     $ 2     $ 282     $ 3,317     $ 2,239     $ (41 )   $ 165     $ 4,894  
                                                                 
Additional Operating Data:
                                                               
 
Number of Stores:
                                                               
 
Open, beginning of quarter
    137       147       154       159       161       178       182       195  
 
Opened during quarter
    10       7       6       2       17       5       13       5  
 
Closed during quarter
    -       -       1       -       -       1       -       -  
                                                                 
 
Total open at end of period
    147       154       159       161       178       182       195       200  
 
Comparable store sales increase
    3.2%       3.2%       6.9%       8.9%       3.5%       0.3%       3.0%       4.6%  
Liquidity and Capital Resources
Our cash requirements are primarily for working capital, construction of new stores, remodeling of existing stores and the improvement of our information systems. Historically, these cash requirements have been met from cash flow from operations, short-term trade credit and borrowings under our revolving lines of credit, long-term debt and capital leases.
Discussion of Cash Flows
For fiscal 2004, cash and cash equivalents increased by $1.8 million to $11.8 million from $10.0 million at the end of fiscal 2003. The primary contributor to the increase in cash and cash equivalents was $12.7 million provided by operating activities, partially offset by $8.6 million used in investing activities, primarily to open new stores and $2.2 million used in financing activities, primarily to make dividend payments to holders of mandatory redeemable stock and repayment on long-term debt and capital lease obligations.
For fiscal 2003, cash and cash equivalents increased by $4.2 million to $10.0 million from $5.8 million at the end of fiscal 2002. The primary contributor to the increase in cash and cash equivalents was $11.2 million of cash provided by operations, partially offset by $6.1 million used in investing activities primarily to open new store

27


Table of Contents

openings. For fiscal 2002, cash and cash equivalents increased by $1.7 million to $5.8 million from $4.1 million at the end of fiscal 2001. The primary contributor to the increase in cash and cash equivalents was $10.5 million of cash provided by operations, partially offset by $5.9 million used in investing activities, primarily to open new store openings and $2.8 million from cash used in financing activities, primarily to pay down our revolving lines of credit.
Net cash provided by operating activities was $12.7 million for fiscal 2004 and $11.2 million for fiscal 2003. Net cash provided by operating activities increased in fiscal 2004 compared to fiscal 2003 primarily because net income increased. Net cash provided by operating activities was $11.2 million for fiscal 2003 and $10.5 million for fiscal 2002. Net cash provided by operating activities increased in fiscal 2003 compared to fiscal 2002 primarily because net income increased.
Net cash used in investing activities was $8.6 million for fiscal 2004, and $6.1 million for fiscal 2003. Net cash used in investing activities increased in fiscal 2004 compared to fiscal 2003 because we purchased additional property and equipment to open 40 new stores compared to 25 new stores in the prior year. Net cash used in investing activities was $6.1 million for fiscal 2003, and $5.9 million for fiscal 2002. Net cash used in investing activities increased in fiscal 2003 compared to fiscal 2002 because we purchased additional property and equipment to open 25 new stores compared to 16 new stores in the prior year.
We anticipate that our capital expenditures will increase to approximately $10 million for fiscal 2005 and $25 to $27 million for fiscal 2006. Fiscal 2005 spending relates to the purchase of property and equipment for the 40 stores we plan to open in 2005. The increase in fiscal 2006 relates to the planned purchase or construction of a new distribution center and the purchase of property and equipment for the 40 stores we plan to open in fiscal 2006. We plan to finance these capital expenditures over the next two fiscal years with cash flow from operations and a portion of the net proceeds from this offering.
Net cash used in financing activities was $2.2 million for fiscal 2004 and approximately $942,000 for fiscal 2003. Net cash used in financing activities for fiscal 2004 was attributable to $1.4 million in payments on preferred stock dividends and approximately $831,000 for payments on capital lease obligations and mortgage payments on our Fahm Street facility. Net cash used in financing activities was approximately $942,000 for fiscal 2003 and $2.8 million for fiscal 2002. Net cash used in financing activities for fiscal 2003 was attributable to payments on capital lease obligations and mortgage payments on our Fahm Street facility. Net cash used in financing activities for fiscal 2002 was primarily attributable to $3.7 million in repayments of our revolving line of credit and approximately $742,000 in payments on capital lease obligations, partially offset by $1.7 million in proceeds from the mortgage on our Fahm Street facility. Until required for other purposes, we maintain our cash and cash equivalents in deposit accounts or highly liquid investments with remaining maturities of 90 days or less at the time of purchase.
Liquidity Sources, Requirements and Contractual Cash Requirements and Commitments
Our principal sources of liquidity consist of: (i) cash and cash equivalents (which equaled $11.8 million as of January 29, 2005); (ii) a secured line of credit with a maximum available borrowing of $25.0 million subject to our inventory levels (with availability of $23.5 million and none drawn down as of January 29, 2005); (iii) an unsecured line of credit with a maximum available borrowing of $3.0 million subject to our inventory levels (with availability of $3.0 million and none drawn down as of January 29, 2005); (iv) cash generated from operations on an ongoing basis as we sell our merchandise inventory; (v) trade credit; and (vi) the remainder of the net proceeds from this offering after the redemption of our Series A Preferred Stock and the repayment of outstanding indebtedness. Short-term trade credit represents a significant source of financing for our inventory purchases. Trade credit arises from customary payment terms and trade practices with our vendors. Our management regularly reviews the adequacy of credit available to us from our vendors. Historically, our principal liquidity requirements have been to meet our working capital and capital expenditure needs.
We believe that our sources of liquidity will be sufficient to fund our operations and anticipated capital expenditures for at least the next 24 months. Our ability to fund these requirements and comply with the financial covenants under our secured lines of credit will depend on our cash flow, which in turn is subject to prevailing economic conditions and financial, business and other factors, some of which are beyond our control. In addition,

28


Table of Contents

as part of our strategy, we intend to continue to open new stores, which will require additional capital. We cannot assure you that additional capital or other sources of liquidity will be available on terms acceptable to us, or at all.
The following table discloses aggregate information about our contractual obligations as of January 29, 2005 and the periods in which payments are due:
                                         
    Payments Due by Period
     
        Less than       More than
    Total   1 Year   1-3 Years   3-5 Years   5 Years
                     
    (in thousands)
Contractual obligations:
                                       
Series A Preferred Stock(1)
  $ 5,364     $ -     $ -     $ 5,364     $ -  
Long-term debt(2)
    1,822       181       1,641       -       -  
Capital leases
    1,528       801       727       -       -  
Operating leases(3)
    29,262       8,224       13,351       7,072       615  
Purchase obligations
    39,237       39,237       -       -       -  
Consulting fee(4)
    960       240       480       240       -  
                                         
 
Total contractual cash obligations
  $ 78,773     $ 48,683     $ 16,200     $ 12,676     $ 615  
                                         
 
(1)  Includes Series A Preferred Stock of $3.6 million, accrued dividends of approximately $380,000 as of January 29, 2005 and dividends of $1.4 million accruing through maturity in April 2009. The board of directors approved a resolution whereby we began making payments of approximately $500,000 per quarter beginning in the second quarter of fiscal 2004. Our Series A Preferred Stock will be redeemed using a portion of the net proceeds from this offering.
 
(2)  Our outstanding long-term debt will be repaid using a portion of the net proceeds from this offering.
 
(3)  Represents fixed minimum rentals in stores and does not include incremental rents which are computed as a percentage of net sales. For example, in fiscal 2004 incremental percentage rent was approximately $723,000 which represented 8.6% of total rent expense.
 
(4)  Represents minimum payments for the four year term of a management consulting agreement that is subject to automatic annual renewals unless terminated with 60 days notice by either party. Upon consummation of this offering, the parties shall terminate the consulting agreement and we will recognize an expense for a termination fee of $1.2 million. The Company is obligated to make such payment no later than December 31, 2005; accordingly, such payment will not be made from the proceeds of this offering.
Indebtedness. We have a revolving line of credit secured by substantially all of our assets pursuant to which we pay customary fees. This secured line of credit expires in April 2007. This secured line of credit provides for aggregate cash borrowings and the issuance of letters of credit up to the lesser of $25.0 million or our borrowing base (which was approximately $23.5 million at January 29, 2005), with a letter of credit sub-limit of $2.0 million. Borrowings under this secured line of credit bear interest at the prime rate plus a spread or LIBOR plus a spread, at our election, based on conditions in the credit agreement. As of January 29, 2005, we had no outstanding borrowings on the line of credit, and no outstanding letters of credit. Under the terms of the credit agreement, we are required to maintain a minimum tangible net worth.
In September 2003, we entered into an annual unsecured revolving line of credit with Bank of America that was renewed in June 2004. The line of credit provides for aggregate cash borrowings up to $3.0 million to be used for general operating purposes. Borrowings under the credit agreement bear interest at LIBOR plus a spread. At January 29, 2005, there was no balance on this revolving line of credit.
We borrow funds under these revolving lines of credit from time to time and subsequently repay such borrowings with available cash generated from operations.
Capital Leases. We have capital lease obligations that financed the purchase of our computer equipment. At January 29, 2005, our capital lease obligations were $1.4 million. These obligations have maturity dates ranging from March 2005 to December 2007. The interest rates on these obligations range from 7.2% to 11.5%. All of these obligations are secured by the computer equipment.
Operating Leases. We lease our stores under operating leases, which generally have an initial term of five years with one five-year renewal option. The typical store lease requires a combination of both fixed monthly rentals

29


Table of Contents

and rentals computed as percentage of net sales after a certain sales threshold has been met. Rental expense was $8.4 million for fiscal 2004 and $6.4 million for fiscal 2003 (including approximately $723,000 and $794,000 of percentage rent, respectively).
Purchase Obligations. As of January 29, 2005, we had purchase obligations of $39.2 million, all of which were for less than one year. These purchase obligations primarily consist of outstanding merchandise orders.
     Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements
Other than the store operating leases described above, we do not have any off-balance sheet arrangements.
Critical Accounting Policies
The preparation of our financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates. We believe the following critical accounting policies describe the more significant judgments and estimates used in the preparation of our financial statements:
     Revenue Recognition
While our recognition of revenue is predominantly derived from routine retail transactions and does not involve significant judgment, revenue recognition represents an important accounting policy of ours. We recognize retail sales at the time the customer takes possession of the merchandise and purchases are paid for less an allowance for returns. We allow for returns up to 10 days after the date of sales and the estimate for returns is based on actual observed return activity 10 days after the period ends. Revenue from layaway sales is recognized when the customer has paid for and received the merchandise. However, revenue from the $2.00 service charge for participating in the program and from the $5.00 re-stocking fee, if charged as part of the layaway program, is recognized at the time of payment. All sales are from cash, check or major credit card company transactions.
     Inventory
Inventory is stated at the lower of cost (first-in, first-out basis) or market as determined by the retail inventory method less a provision for inventory shrinkage. Under the retail inventory method, the cost value of inventory and gross margins are determined by calculating a cost-to-retail ratio and applying it to the retail value of inventory. Inherent in the retail inventory calculation are certain significant management judgments and estimates including, among others, merchandise markups, markdowns and shrinkage, which impact the ending inventory valuation at cost as well as resulting gross margins. We estimate a shrinkage reserve for the period between the last physical count and the balance sheet date. The estimate for the shrinkage reserve can be affected by changes in actual shrinkage trends. We believe the first-in first-out retail inventory method results in an inventory valuation that is fairly stated. Many retailers have arrangements with vendors that provide for rebates and allowances under certain conditions, which ultimately affect the value of the inventory. We have not entered into such arrangements with our vendors.
     Property and Equipment, net
We have a significant investment in property and equipment. Property and equipment are stated at cost. Equipment under capital leases is stated at the present value of minimum lease payments. Depreciation and amortization are computed using the straight-line method over the lesser of the estimated useful lives (primarily three to five years for computer equipment and furniture, fixtures and equipment, five years for leasehold improvements, and 15 years for buildings) of the related assets or the relevant lease term, whichever is shorter. Any reduction in these estimated useful lives would result in a higher annual depreciation expense for the related assets.

30


Table of Contents

     Impairment of Long-Lived Assets
We continually evaluate whether events and changes in circumstances warrant revised estimates of the useful lives or recognition of an impairment loss for intangible assets. Future adverse changes in market and legal conditions, or poor operating results of underlying assets could result in losses or an inability to recover the carrying value of the intangible asset, thereby possibly requiring an impairment charge in the future. If facts and circumstances indicate that a long-lived asset, including property and equipment, may be impaired, the carrying value is reviewed. If this review indicates that the carrying value of the asset will not be recovered as determined based on projected undiscounted cash flows related to the asset over its remaining life, the carrying value of the asset is reduced to its estimated fair value. Impairment losses in the future are dependent on a number of factors such as site selection and general economic trends, and thus could be significantly different from historical results. To the extent our estimates for net sales, gross profit and store expenses are not realized, future assessments of recoverability could result in impairment charges.
     Stock-Based Compensation
We apply the intrinsic-value-based method of accounting prescribed by Accounting Principles Board (APB) Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and related interpretations including FASB interpretation (FIN) No. 44, Accounting for Certain Transactions involving Stock Compensation, an interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25, to account for our fixed-plan stock options. Under this method, compensation expense is recorded on the date of grant only if the current fair value of the underlying stock exceeds the exercise price. We recognize the fair value of stock rights granted to non-employees in the accompanying financial statements. SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, and SFAS No. 148, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation – Transition and Disclosure, an amendment of FASB Statement No. 123, establishes accounting and disclosure requirements using a fair-value-based method of accounting for stock-based employee compensation plans. As permitted by existing accounting standards, we have elected to continue to apply the intrinsic-value-based method of accounting described above, and have adopted only the disclosure requirements of SFAS No. 123, as amended. Pro forma information regarding net income and net income per share is required in order to show our net income as if we had accounted for employee stock options under the fair value method of SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, as amended by SFAS No. 148, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation— Transition Disclosure. This information is contained in Notes 2 and 8 to our financial statements. The fair values of options and shares issued pursuant to our option plan at each grant date were estimated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.
     Accounting for Income Taxes
We account for income taxes in accordance with SFAS No. 109, Accounting for Income Taxes. The computation of income taxes is subject to estimation due to the judgment required and the uncertainty related to the recoverability of deferred tax assets or the outcome of tax audits. We adjust our income tax provision in the period it is determined that actual results will differ from our estimates. Tax law and rate changes are reflected in the income tax provision in which such changes are enacted.
The above listing is not intended to be a comprehensive list of all our accounting policies. In many cases the accounting treatment of a particular transaction is specifically dictated by generally accepted accounting principles, with no need for management’s judgment in their application. There are also areas in which management’s judgment in selecting any available alternative would not produce a materially different result.
Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk
We are exposed to financial market risks related to changes in interest rates connected with our revolving lines of credit which bear interest at variable rates. We cannot predict market fluctuations in interest rates. As a result, future results may differ materially from estimated results due to adverse changes in interest rates or debt availability. A hypothetical 100 basis point increase in prevailing market interest rates would not have materially impacted our financial position, results of operations, cash flows for fiscal 2004. We do not engage in financial transactions for trading or speculative purposes, and we have not entered into any interest rate hedging contracts.

31


Table of Contents

We source all of our product from apparel markets in the United States and, therefore, are not subject to fluctuations in foreign currency exchange rates. We have not entered into forward contracts to hedge against fluctuations in foreign currency prices.
If we were to begin sourcing product directly from overseas, our risk management policy would allow us to utilize foreign currency forward and option contracts to manage currency exposures. If we were to enter into hedging contracts, we anticipate that the contracts would have maturities of less than three months and would settle before the end of each quarterly period. Additionally, we do not expect to enter into any hedging contracts for trading or speculative purposes.
We had cash and cash equivalents totaling $11.8 million at January 29, 2005. These amounts were maintained in deposit accounts or highly liquid investments with remaining maturities of 90 days or less at the time of purchase. Due to the short-term nature of these investments, we believe that we do not have material exposure to changes in the fair value of our investments as a result of changes in interest rates. Declines in interest rates, however, will reduce future investment income. We do not enter into investments for trading or speculative purposes.
Recently Issued Accounting Standards
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 153, Exchanges of Nonmonetary Assets. SFAS No. 153 amends APB Opinion No. 29, Accounting for Nonmonetary Transactions, which requires that exchanges of nonmonetary assets be measured based on the fair value of the assets exchanged, but which includes certain exceptions to that principle. SFAS No. 153 eliminates the exception from APB Opinion No. 29 for nonmonetary exchanges of similar productive assets and replaces it with a general exception for exchanges of nonmonetary assets that do not have a commercial substance. SFAS No. 153 is effective for nonmonetary asset exchanges occurring in fiscal periods beginning after June 15, 2005. The adoption of SFAS No. 153 is not expected to have a material impact on our consolidated financial position or results of operations.
In December 2004, the FASB issued a revision to SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation. SFAS No. 123R replaces SFAS No. 123 and supersedes APB Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and establishes standards for the accounting for transactions in which an entity exchanges its equity instruments for goods or services. SFAS No. 123R focuses primarily on accounting for transactions in which an entity obtains employee services in share-based payment transactions and is effective as of the beginning of the first reporting period that begins after June 15, 2005 for public entities that do not file as small business issuers. We have illustrated the effect on our earnings as if we had adopted the fair value method of accounting for stock-based compensation under SFAS No. 123. This information is contained in notes 2 and 8 to our financial statements. The fair values of options and shares issued pursuant to our option plan at each grant date were estimated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model. The fair value-based method of SFAS No. 123 is similar in most respects to the fair value-based method under SFAS No. 123R, although the election of certain methods within the applicable transition rules of SFAS No. 123R may affect the impact on our consolidated financial position or results of operations. Such impact, if any, on our consolidated financial position or results of operations has not been determined.
In December 2003, the FASB issued FIN 46R, Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, which is an interpretation of Accounting Research Bulletin No. 51, Consolidated Financial Statements. FIN 46R requires that if an entity has a controlling interest in a variable interest entity, the assets, liabilities and results of activities of the variable interest entity should be included in the consolidated financial statements of the entity. FIN 46R is effective immediately for all new variable interest entities created or acquired after December 31, 2003. The adoption of FIN 46R is not expected to have an impact on our consolidated financial position or results of operations.

32


Table of Contents

Business
We are a rapidly growing, value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories for the entire family. We offer quality, branded products from nationally recognized brands, as well as private label products and a limited assortment of home décor items. Our merchandise offerings are designed to appeal to the preferences of fashion conscious consumers, particularly African-Americans. We believe that we provide our merchandise offering at compelling values. We seek to provide nationally recognized branded merchandise offered at 20% to 60% discounts to department and specialty stores’ regular prices. Our stores average approximately 8,500 square feet of selling space and are typically located in neighborhood shopping centers that are convenient to low to moderate income customers. Originally our stores were located in the Southeast, and we have recently expanded into the Mid-Atlantic region and Texas. We currently operate 208 stores in both urban and rural markets in twelve states. In each of fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2006, we intend to open 40 new stores, approximately 70% of which are expected to be located in states that we currently serve.
Our predecessor was founded in 1946 and grew to become a chain of family apparel stores operating in the Southeast under the Allied Department Stores name. In 1999, our chain of stores, then consisting of 85 stores throughout the Southeast, was acquired by Hampshire Equity Partners, a private equity firm. Our management team has implemented several strategies designed to differentiate our stores, improve our operating and financial performance and position us for growth, including:
  •   focusing our merchandise offerings on more urban fashion apparel for the entire family, with greater emphasis on nationally recognized brands;
 
  •   accelerating and completing the remodeling of virtually all of the 85 stores acquired in 1999 to create a more appealing shopping environment;
 
  •   refining our new store model and implementing a real estate approach focused on locating stores in low to moderate income neighborhoods close to our core customers;
 
  •   rebranding our stores and our company to Citi Trends in order to convey more effectively our positioning to consumers;
 
  •   investing in infrastructure to support growth, including opening an additional distribution center and installing new point of sale systems in all of our stores; and
 
  •   implementing an aggressive growth strategy, including entering several new markets such as Houston, Norfolk and, most recently, Baltimore and Washington, D.C.
Industry
According to NPD Fashionworld, a division of the NPD Group, or NPD, a nationally recognized firm that specializes in apparel research, based on Consumer Panel Estimated Data, retail sales of off-price apparel totaled $16.5 billion in the U.S. in 2004, up more than 15% from 2003. The popularity of this segment continues to grow, with off-price retailers accounting for 9.5% of overall retail apparel sales in the U.S. in 2004, versus 8.6% in 2003 and 8.2% in 2002, according to NPD.
The off-price apparel market is dominated by large format, national apparel companies, such as The TJX Companies, Burlington Coat Factory and Ross Stores. Our management believes that these retailers generally target more affluent consumers and seek to achieve high volumes by serving the fashion needs of a broad segment of the population. Mass merchants and general merchandise discount retailers, such as Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. and Kmart Corp., also offer apparel at reduced prices, but we believe that they generally focus on basic apparel and are less fashion oriented. As a result, we believe there is significant demand for a value retailer that addresses the market of low to moderate income consumers generally and, particularly, African-American and other minority consumers who seek value-priced, urban fashion apparel and accessories. We believe this market benefits from several favorable characteristics, including:
Growing Market with Favorable Demographics. Based on U.S. Census Bureau data, approximately 31% of the U.S. population was non-white in 2000 versus approximately 20% in 1980. According to the U.S. Census Bureau data this percentage is estimated to increase to approximately 35% by 2010. Within this market, African-

33


Table of Contents

Americans represented 12.7% of the population as of 2000, which is expected to increase to 13.1% in 2010, based upon U.S. Census Bureau data.
Significant Spending on Apparel. According to the Selig Center for Economic Growth at The University of Georgia, or the Selig Center, the combined U.S. buying power of non-whites grew from $540.8 billion in 1990 to approximately $1.2 trillion in 2000. During that period, buying power for African-Americans grew from $318.3 billion to $584.9 billion and is estimated by the Selig Center to grow approximately 65% to $964.6 billion in 2009.
We believe our core customers are more fashion oriented, which results in a greater propensity to purchase apparel. According to the U.S. Department of Labor, African-Americans spend 4.7% of their annual income on apparel and related products and services, compared to 3.5% for the U.S. population as a whole.
Expansion of Urban Apparel Brands. In recent years, a series of nationally recognized urban brands, often associated with hip-hop and rap musicians, has emerged and gained significant popularity. These brands offer distinctive, urban apparel designed to appeal to African-American consumers, as well as to the broader population. Sales from 13 national urban apparel brands tracked by NPD totaled approximately $1.9 billion in 2004, an increase of approximately 46% from 2003.
Business Strengths
Our goal is to be the leading value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories. We believe the following business strengths differentiate us from our competitors and are important to our success:
Focus on Urban Fashion Mix. We focus our merchandise on urban fashions, which we believe appeals to our core customers. We do not attempt to dictate trends, but rather devote considerable effort to identifying emerging trends and ensuring that our apparel assortment is considered timely and fashionable in the urban market. Our merchandising staff tests new merchandise before reordering and actively manages the mix of brands and products in our stores to keep our offering fresh and minimize markdowns.
Superior Value Proposition. As a value-priced retailer, we seek to offer first quality, fashionable merchandise at compelling prices. We seek to provide nationally recognized brands offered at 20% to 60% discounts to department and specialty stores’ regular prices. We also offer products under our proprietary brands such as Citi Steps, Diva Blue and Urban Sophistication. These private labels enable us to expand product selection, offer fashion merchandise at lower prices and enhances our product offerings.
Merchandise Mix that Appeals to the Entire Family. We merchandise our stores to create a destination environment capable of meeting the fashion needs of the entire value-conscious family. Each store offers a wide variety of products for men and women, as well as infants, toddlers, boys and girls. Our stores feature sportswear, dresses, plus-sized apparel, outerwear, footwear and accessories, as well as a limited assortment of home décor items. We believe that the breadth of our merchandise distinguishes our stores from many competitors that offer urban apparel primarily for women, and reduces our exposure to fashion trends and demand cycles in any single category.
Strong and Flexible Sourcing Relationships. We maintain strong sourcing relationships with a large group of suppliers. We have purchased merchandise from more than 1,000 vendors in the past twelve months. Purchasing is controlled by our 20-member buying team located at our Savannah, Georgia headquarters and in New York, New York, and our buyers have an average of more than 20 years of retail experience. We purchase merchandise through planned programs with vendors at reduced prices and opportunistically through close-outs, with the majority of our merchandise purchased for the current season and a limited quantity held for sale in future seasons. To foster our vendor relationships, we pay vendors promptly and do not ask for typical retail concessions such as promotional and markdown allowances or delivery concessions such as drop shipments to stores.
Attractive Fashion Presentation and Store Environment. We seek to provide a fashion-focused shopping environment that is similar to a specialty apparel retailer, rather than a typical off-price store. Products from nationally recognized brands are prominently displayed by brand, rather than by size, on dedicated, four-way fixtures featuring multiple sizes and styles. The remaining merchandise is arranged on hanging racks. All stores

34


Table of Contents

are carpeted and well-lit, with most featuring a sound system that plays urban adult and urban contemporary music throughout the store. Nearly all of our stores have either been opened or remodeled in the past six years.
Highly Profitable Store Model. We operate a proven and efficient store model that delivers strong cash flow and store level return on investment. We locate stores in high traffic strip shopping centers that are convenient to low and moderate income neighborhoods. We generally utilize previously occupied store sites. This approach enables us to generate substantial traffic at attractive rents. Similarly, our advertising expenses are low as we do not rely on promotion-driven sales but rather seek to build our reputation for value through everyday low prices. At the same time, from an investment perspective, we seek to design stores that are inviting and easy to shop, while limiting startup and fixturing costs. As a result, our stores generate rapid payback of investments, typically within twelve to 14 months.
Growth Strategy
Our growth strategy is to open stores in new and existing markets, as well as to increase sales in existing stores. Adding stores in the markets we currently serve often enables us to benefit from enhanced name recognition and achieve advertising and operating synergies. In fiscal 2003 and fiscal 2004, we opened 25 and 40 stores, respectively, and entered the Houston, Norfolk, Baltimore and Washington, D.C. markets. Of the 25 stores opened in fiscal 2003, the average sales were $1.3 million.
In each of fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2006, we intend to open 40 new stores, approximately 70% of which we expect to locate in states we currently serve.
We intend to increase comparable store sales through merchandising enhancements in those existing categories for which recent sales and/or sales trends are encouraging and the expansion of adjacent product categories. In order to expand such adjacent categories, we have recently added a dedicated buyer in home décor and upgraded our buying capabilities and focus within the intimate apparel category.
Store Operations
Store Format. Our existing 208 stores’ average selling space is approximately 8,700 square feet, which allows us space and flexibility to departmentalize our stores and provide directed traffic patterns. New stores added in fiscal 2004 averaged approximately 10,700 square feet, which is larger than the stores added in fiscal 2003 and significantly larger than our historical store base. As a result of these new stores, as well as due to the remodeling and expansion of existing stores in fiscal 2003, our average square footage of selling space per store has increased from approximately 7,600 at the end of fiscal 2002 to its current level.
We arrange our stores in a racetrack format with women’s sportswear, our most attractive and fashion current merchandise, in the center of each store, and complementary categories adjacent to those items. Men’s and boy’s apparel is displayed on one side of the store while dresses, footwear and accessories are displayed on the other side. Merchandise for infants, toddlers and girls is displayed along the back of the store. Impulse items, such as jewelry and sunglasses, are featured near the checkout area. Products from nationally recognized brands are prominently displayed on four way racks at the front of each department. The remaining merchandise is displayed on hanging racks and occasionally on table displays. Large hanging signs identify each category location. The unobstructed floor plan allows the customer to see virtually all of the different product areas from the store entrance and provides us the flexibility easily to expand and contract departments in response to consumer demand, seasonality and merchandise availability.
Virtually all of our inventory is displayed on the selling floor. Our prices are clearly marked and often have the comparative retail-selling price noted on the price tag.
Store Management. Store operations are managed by our Vice President of Store Operations, three regional managers and 21 district managers, each of whom typically manages eight to ten stores. Our typical store is staffed with a store manager, two or three assistant managers and seven to eight part time sales associates, all of whom rotate work days on a shift basis. District managers and store managers participate in a bonus program based on achieving predetermined levels of sales and profits. The district managers also participate in bonus programs based on achieving targeted payroll costs. Our regional managers participate in a bonus program based

35


Table of Contents

on a rollup of the district managers’ bonuses. The assistant managers and sales associates are compensated on an hourly basis with incentives. Moreover, we recognize individual performance through internal promotions and provide extensive opportunities for advancement, particularly given our rapid growth.
We place significant emphasis on loss prevention in order to control inventory shrinkage. Our initiatives include electronic tags on all of our products, training and education of store personnel on loss prevention issues, digital video camera systems, alarm systems and motion detectors in the stores. We also capture extensive point-of-sale data and maintain systems that monitor returns, voids and employee sales, and produce trend and exception reports to assist us in identifying shrinkage issues. We have a centralized loss prevention team that focuses exclusively on implementation of our initiatives and specifically on stores that have experienced above average levels of shrinkage.
Employee Training. Our employees are critical to achieving our goals, and we strive to hire employees with high energy levels and motivation. We have well-established store operating policies and procedures and an extensive 90-day in-store training program for new store managers and assistant managers. Our sales associates also participate in a 30-day customer service and store procedures training program, which is designed to enable them to assist customers in a friendly, helpful manner.
Layaway Program. We offer a layaway program that allows customers to purchase merchandise by initially paying a 20% deposit together with a $2.00 service charge. The customer then makes additional payments every two weeks and has 60 days within which to complete the purchase. If the purchase is not completed, the customer receives a merchandise credit for amounts paid less a $5.00 re-stocking fee and the service charge. Sales under our layaway program accounted for approximately 13% of our total sales in fiscal 2004.
Store Economics. We believe we benefit from attractive store-level economics. The average investment for the 41 stores we opened in fiscal 2002 and fiscal 2003, including leasehold improvements, equipment, cost of inventory to stock the store (net of accounts payable) and preopening store expenses, was approximately $240,000. These 41 stores generated average sales of $1.2 million and average store operating profit (defined as store operating revenue less cost of sales and store operating expenses) of $190,000 during their first twelve months of operation. Our average investment for the 40 stores opened in fiscal 2004 was approximately $280,000. This investment represents an increase over prior years as the size of our stores has increased and, in some instances, we have paid for leasehold improvements that we expect to recover over time. We expect these stores to generate similar levels of return on investment.
Store Locations
As of March 31, 2005, we operated 208 stores located in twelve states. Our stores are primarily located in strip shopping centers and downtown business districts. We have no franchising relationships as all of our stores are

36


Table of Contents

company-operated. The table below sets forth the number of stores in each of these twelve states and the specific markets within each such state in which we operated at least two stores as of March 31, 2005:
           
Alabama—17
   Louisiana—23    South Carolina—32
 
Birmingham—4
    Shreveport—3     Charleston—2
 
Montgomery—2
    Baton Rouge—2     Columbia—2
 
Mobile—2
    Monroe—2     Orangeburg—2
 
Single store locations—9
    New Orleans—2     Single store locations—26
Arkansas—4
    Single store locations—14    Tennessee—9
 
Little Rock—3
   Maryland—3     Memphis—6
 
Single store locations—1
    Baltimore—2     Nashville—2
Florida—14
    Single store locations—1     Single store locations—1
 
Jacksonville—3
   Mississippi—17    Texas—6
 
Tampa—2
    Jackson—2     Houston—6
 
Single store locations—9
    Single store locations—15   Virginia—11
Georgia—44
   North Carolina—28     Norfolk—6
 
Atlanta—9
    Charlotte—2     Richmond—4
 
Albany—2
    Durham—2     Single store locations—1
 
Augusta—2
    Fayetteville—2    
 
Macon—2
    Greensboro—2    
 
Savannah—2
    Single store locations—20    
 
Single store locations—27
       
Site Selection. Cost-effective store locations are an important part of our profitability model. Accordingly, we look for second and third use store locations that offer attractive rents, but also meet our demographic and economic criteria.
In selecting a location, we target both urban and rural markets. Demographic criteria used in site selection include concentrations of our core consumers. In addition, we require convenient site accessibility, as well as strong co-tenants, such as food stores, dollar stores, rent-to-own stores and other apparel stores. We prepare detailed demographic studies and pro forma financial statements for each prospective store location. Our economic criteria for a site include specific store-level profitability and return on capital invested.
We have a dedicated real estate management team responsible for new store site selection. Our group has identified a significant number of target sites in existing strip shopping centers and off-mall locations with appropriate market characteristics in both new and existing markets. We opened a total of 65 new stores in fiscal 2003 and fiscal 2004. In each of fiscal 2005 and fiscal 2006, we intend to open an additional 40 stores. We expect to fund our store openings with a portion of the net proceeds from this offering and cash flow from operations.
Shortly after we sign a new store lease, our store construction department prepares the store by installing fixtures, signs, dressing rooms, checkout counters, cash register systems and other items. Once we take possession of a store site, we can open the store within approximately three to four weeks.
Product Merchandising and Pricing
Merchandising. Our merchandising policy is to offer high quality, branded products at attractive prices for the entire value-conscious family. We seek to maintain a diverse assortment of first quality, in-season merchandise that appeals to the distinctive tastes and preferences of our core customers. Approximately 30% of our sales are typically represented by nationally recognized brands that we purchase from approximately 30 to 50 vendors. We also offer a wide variety of products from less recognized brands that represent approximately 60% of sales. The remaining 10% of sales represent private label products under our proprietary brands such as Citi Steps, Diva Blue and Urban Sophistication. Our private label products enable us to expand product selection, offer merchandise at lower prices and enhances our product offerings.
Our merchandise includes apparel, accessories and home décor. Within apparel, we offer men’s, women’s, which includes dresses, sportswear and plus size offerings, and children’s, which includes offerings for infants, toddlers, boys and girls. We also offer accessories, which includes intimate apparel, handbags, hats, jewelry, footwear, toys, belts and sleepwear, as well as a limited assortment of home décor, which includes giftware, lamps, pictures, mirrors and figurines.

37


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth our approximate merchandise assortment by classification as a percentage of net sales for fiscal 2004. The Company has made an estimate for layaways based on total Company layaway transactions still outstanding at January 29, 2005.
     
    Percentage of
    Net Sales
     
Women’s
  38%
Children’s
  27%
Men’s
  21%
Accessories
  13%
Home décor
   1%
Pricing. We purchase our merchandise at low prices and mark prices up less than department or specialty stores. We seek to provide our nationally recognized brands are offered at prices 20% to 60% below regular retail prices available in department stores and specialty stores, and that product offering validates both our value and fashion positioning to our consumers. We also consider the price-to-value relationships of our non-branded products to be strong. Our basic pricing strategy is everyday low prices. Our discount from the suggested retail price is usually reflected on the price tag. We review each department in our stores at least monthly for possible markdowns based on sales rates and fashion seasons to promote faster turnover of inventory and to accelerate the flow of current merchandise. Our return policy permits any customer the right to return merchandise within ten days of purchase and receive a cash refund if they have a receipt, unless such item was purchased in a closeout or discount in which case we will only permit a merchandise exchange. We believe that our practice in this regard is more restrictive when compared to other apparel retailers.
Sourcing and Allocation
Our merchandising department oversees the sourcing and allocation of merchandise to our stores, which allows us to utilize volume purchase discounts and maintain control over our inventory. We source our merchandise from over 1,000 vendors, consisting of domestic manufacturers and importers. For fiscal 2004, no vendor represented over 6% of our net sales. Our President and Chief Merchandising Officer supervises our 13 member planning and allocation team, as well as our buying team which is comprised of five merchandise managers and 14 buyers. Consistent with our plan to grow the intimate apparel and home décor categories, we recently added a dedicated buyer in home décor and upgraded our buying capabilities and focus in intimate apparel.
Our buyers have an average of 20 years of experience in the retail business and have developed long-standing relationships with many of our vendors, including those controlling the distribution of branded apparel. These buyers are responsible for maintaining vendor relationships, securing high quality, fashionable merchandise that meets our margin requirements and identifying and responding to emerging fashion trends. Our buyers, who are based in Savannah and New York, accomplish this by traveling to the major United States apparel markets regularly, visiting our major manufacturers and attending national and regional apparel trade shows, including urban-focused trade shows. We also retain the services of two independent fashion consulting firms, Barbara Fields Buying and Henry Donegar Associates, that monitor market trends.
Our buyers purchase merchandise in styles, sizes and quantities to meet inventory levels developed by our planning staff. We work closely with our suppliers and are able to differentiate ourselves by our willingness to purchase less than a full assortment of styles, colors and sizes and by our policy of paying promptly and not asking for typical retail concessions such as promotional and markdown allowances. Our purchasing department utilizes several buying techniques that enable us to offer to consumers branded and other merchandise at everyday low prices. The majority of the nationally recognized branded products we sell are purchased in-season and represent our vendors’ excess inventories resulting from production or retailer order cancellations. We generally purchase later in the merchandising buying cycle than department and specialty stores. This allows us to take advantage of imbalances between retailers’ demands for specific merchandise and manufacturers’ supply of that merchandise. We also purchase merchandise from some vendors in advance of the selling season at reduced prices. Occasionally, we purchase merchandise on an opportunistic basis, which we then “pack and hold” for sale three to nine months later. Where possible, we seek to purchase items based on style or color in limited quantities

38


Table of Contents

on a test basis with the right to reorder as needed. Finally, we purchase private label merchandise that we source to our specifications.
As is customary in the industry, we do not enter into long-term contracts with any of our suppliers. While we believe we may encounter delays if we change suppliers, we believe alternate sources of merchandise for all product categories are available at comparable prices.
We allocate merchandise across our store base according to store-level demand. Our merchandising staff utilizes a centralized management system to monitor merchandise purchasing, allocation and sales in order to maximize inventory turnover, identify and respond to changing product demands and determine the timing of mark-downs to our merchandise. Our buyers also regularly review the age and condition of our merchandise and manage both the reordering and clearance processes. In addition, our merchandising team communicates with our regional, district and store managers to ascertain regional and store-level conditions and to better ensure that our product mix meets our consumers’ demands in terms of quality, fashion, price and availability.
Advertising and Marketing
Our advertising goal is to build the “Citi Trends” brand and promote consumers’ association of our brand with value, quality, fashion and everyday low prices. We generally focus our advertising efforts during the Easter, back-to-school and Christmas seasons. This advertising consists of radio commercials on local hip-hop radio stations that highlight our brands, our value and our everyday low prices. We also do in-store advertising that includes window signs designated for special purposes, such as seasonal events and clearance periods, and taped audio advertisements co-mingled with our in-store music programs. Signs change in color, quantity and theme every three to six weeks. For store grand openings, we typically seek to create community awareness and consumer excitement through radio advertising preceding and during the grand opening and by creating an on-site event with local radio personalities broadcasting from the new location. We also distribute promotional items such as gift certificates and shopping sprees in connection with our grand openings.
Our marketing efforts center on promoting our everyday low prices and on demonstrating the strong price-to-value relationship of our products to our consumers. We do not utilize promotional advertising. Our merchandise is priced so that our competition rarely has lower prices. In the limited situations where our competition offers the same merchandise at a lower price, we will match the price.
Distribution
All merchandise sold in our stores is shipped directly from our distribution centers in Savannah, Georgia. In November 2004, we opened our second distribution center located on Coleman Boulevard, approximately 10 miles from our primary distribution center, the Fahm Street facility. The Coleman facility is used to process all receipts, as well as to warehouse “pack and hold” merchandise and merchandise held for new store openings. After merchandise is received and quality control functions are performed, the merchandise is moved to the Fahm Street facility for processing and shipping to the stores.
All work necessary to prepare the merchandise to be sales-floor ready is performed in our distribution centers. Some of our merchandise comes from vendors pre-ticketed and pre-packed and can be shipped directly from the distribution centers to our stores without repacking. However, most merchandise has to be price ticketed and repacked in store shipping units before being shipped to the stores.
We generally ship merchandise from Savannah to stores daily, but approximately 40 of our smaller volume stores receive merchandise every other day. Savannah is centrally located to our store base, and most of our stores are within a two-day drive from our distribution centers. We use United Parcel Service, Inc. and FedEx Corporation to ship merchandise to our stores. Our distribution centers have a combined 240,000 square feet, including approximately 20,000 square feet of office space. We expect these facilities to support our distribution and office capacity needs for at least the next two years. We intend to use a portion of the net proceeds from this offering to acquire, lease or construct and design a new distribution center in fiscal 2006. We have hired a third party to conduct a site and feasability study regarding the necessary size and location of a new facility. After receipt of the report, we will determine whether to acquire, lease or design and construct a new facility.

39


Table of Contents

Quality control reviews of every merchandise receipt are performed by a dedicated team at the Coleman facility. This team is also responsible for working with our vendors and manufacturers to ensure consistent and superior quality across our private label merchandise, which accounts for approximately 10% of our net sales. Nearly all of our merchandise is purchased from recognized domestic manufacturers and importers, which reduces our risk of inadvertently handling counterfeit items.
Information Technology and Systems
We have information systems in place to support each of our business functions. We purchased our enterprise software from Island Pacific, a primary software provider to the retail industry. Our computer platform is an IBM AS400. The Island Pacific software supports the following business functions: purchasing, purchase order management, price and markdown management, distribution, merchandise allocation, general ledger, accounts payable and sales audit.
The Island Pacific merchandise system captures and reports sales and inventory by item, by store and by day. This information allows our merchandising team to evaluate merchandise performance in considerable detail with high levels of precision. Over the last four years we have enhanced the Island Pacific software, particularly to enhance merchandise allocation and distribution functions. In 2004, we purchased and installed Buyers Toolbox software to aid our merchandise planning and allocation functions.
Our stores use point-of-sale software from DataVantage, a division of MICROS Systems, Inc., to run our store cash registers. The system uses bar code scanners at checkout to capture item sales. It also supports end-of-day processing and automatically transmits sales and transaction data to Savannah each night. Additionally, the software supports store time clock and payroll functions. To facilitate marking down and re-ticketing merchandise, employees in our stores use hand-held scanners that read the correct item price and prepare new price tickets for merchandise. Our DataVantage software also enables us to sort and review transaction data, generate exception and other database reporting to assist in loss prevention.
In 2005, we plan to complete installation of the latest upgrade to the DataVantage software. The new software will enable improved and less costly telecommunications between stores and our Fahm Street facility. The upgrade will also provide improved credit and debit card processing, gift card capability, store e-mail and more reliable data transmissions to our home office systems.
We believe that our information systems, with upgrades and updates over time, are adequate to support our operations for the foreseeable future. Additionally, we recently upgraded our website to enable Internet sales of selected urban branded apparel provided by third parties. We will earn commissions on these sales.
Competition
The markets we serve are highly competitive. The principal methods of competition in our retail business are fashion, assortment, pricing and presentation. We believe we have a competitive advantage in our offering of fashionable brands at everyday low prices. We compete against a diverse group of retailers including national off-price retailers, mass merchants, smaller specialty retailers and dollar stores. The off-price retail companies that we compete with include The TJX Companies, Burlington Coat Factory and Ross Stores. In particular, TJX’s A.J. Wright stores target moderate income consumers. Ross Stores, Inc. has recently launched a similar concept targeting lower income consumers, called dd’s DISCOUNTS. We believe our strategy of appealing to African-American consumers and offering urban apparel products allows us to compete successfully with these retailers. We also believe we offer a more inviting store format than the off-price retailers with carpeted floors and more prominently displayed brands. We also compete with a group of smaller specialty retailers that only sell women’s products, such as Rainbow, Dots, Fashion Cents, It’s Fashions and Simply Fashions. Our mass merchant competitors include Wal-Mart and Kmart. These chains do not focus on fashion apparel and, within their apparel offering, lack the urban focus that we believe differentiates our offering and appeals to our core customers. Similarly, while some of the dollar store chains offer apparel, they typically offer a more limited selection focused on basic apparel needs.

40


Table of Contents

Intellectual Property
We regard our trademarks and service marks as having significant value and as being important to our marketing efforts. We have registered the “Citi Trends” trademark with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office on the Principal Register as both a trademark for retail department store services and as a trademark for clothing. We have also registered the following trademarks with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office on the Principal Register: “Citi Club,” “Citi Knights,” “Citi Nite,” “Citi Steps,” “Citi Trends Fashion for Less,” “Citi Women,” “CT Sport,” “Diva Blue,” “Univer Soul” and “Vintage Harlem.” We also have applications pending with the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office on the Principal Register for the following trademarks: “Citi Express,” “Lil Citi Man,” “Lil Ms Hollywood” and “Urban Sophistication.” Our policy is to pursue registration of our marks and to oppose vigorously infringement of our marks.
Properties
All our existing 208 stores, totaling approximately 2.2 million gross square feet, are leased under operating leases. Additionally, as of March 31, 2005, we have signed leases for nineteen new stores to be opened during fiscal 2005 aggregating approximately 247,748 total gross square feet. Our typical store lease is for five years with an option to extend our lease term for an additional five-year period, and all but one lease requires us to pay percentage rent and increases in specified site-related charges. Nearly all of our store leases provide us the right to cancel following an initial three-year period in the event the store does not meet pre-determined sales levels.
We own an approximately 170,000 square foot facility located on Fahm Street in Savannah, Georgia, that serves as our headquarters and one of our two distribution centers. This facility is financed under a mortgage with a remaining principal balance of $1.5 million that is due in July 2007. We intend to repay this mortgage with a portion of the proceeds from this offering. We currently lease the land and building for our other distribution center located on Coleman Boulevard. The lease for this distribution center expires in September 2006, with options to renew for up to three more years. In addition, we currently lease 1,200 square feet in New York City, which is used for buyer operations and meetings with vendors.
Employees
As of January 29, 2005, we had approximately 800 full-time and approximately 1,000 part-time employees. Of these employees, approximately 1,500 are employed in our stores and the remainder are employed in our distribution centers and corporate offices. We are not a party to any collective bargaining agreements, and none of our employees is represented by a labor union.
Legal Proceedings
We are from time to time involved in various legal proceedings incidental to the conduct of our business, including claims by our customers, employees or former employees. We are currently the defendant in two putative collective action lawsuits commenced by former employees, under the Fair Labor Standards Act. The plaintiff in each of the lawsuits is represented by the same law firm, and both suits are pending in the Montgomery County District Court of the United States for the Middle District of Alabama, Northern Division. A female employee who represents, the class who is a former manager-in-training, claims she was misclassified as an exempt employee under the Fair Labor Standards Act and that she worked significant overtime for which she has not been compensated. She is seeking unpaid compensation and benefits, liquidated damages, attorneys fees, costs and injunctive relief. A female employee who represents the class, who is a former sales associate, claims the Company has a policy of requiring its associates to work off the clock in violation of the Fair Labor Standards Act and that she was forced to work off the clock and has not been compensated for her straight time or overtime. She is also seeking unpaid compensation and benefits, liquidated damages, attorneys fees, costs and injunctive relief. To date, five people have opted in to the class. Each of the cases is in its early stages, and we are in the process of evaluating the claims made. While our review of the allegations is preliminary, we believe that our business practices are, and were during the relevant periods, in compliance with the law. We plan to defend these suits vigorously.

41


Table of Contents

Management
Executive Officers and Directors
The following table sets forth information regarding our executive officers and directors, as well as our nominees for our board of directors pending the closing of this offering, and their ages:
             
Name   Age   Position
         
R. Edward Anderson
    55     Chief Executive Officer and Director
George A. Bellino*
    57     President, Chief Merchandising Officer and Director
Thomas W. Stoltz
    44     Chief Financial Officer
James A. Dunn
    48     Vice President of Store Operations
Gregory P. Flynn
    48     Chairman of the Board of Directors
Laurens M. Goff*
    32     Director
John S. Lupo
    58     Director
Tracy L. Noll
    56     Director
          **
          Director Nominee
 
  Will resign from our board of directors upon the consummation of this offering.
**  Will join our board of directors upon the consummation of this offering.
Upon the consummation of this offering, our board of directors will consist of five members. After this offering we expect to restructure our board of directors and appoint                     as an independent director. In connection with this restructuring, we expect that two of our current directors, Messrs. Bellino and Goff, will resign upon the consummation of this offering.
R. Edward Anderson. Mr. Anderson has served as our Chief Executive Officer and as a director since December 2001. Prior to his current responsibilities, Mr. Anderson served as Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Variety Wholesalers, our previous owner, from December 1997 to December 2001. From 1978 to 1994, Mr. Anderson served as Chief Financial Officer of Rose’s Stores, Inc., a discount retailer. In August 1994, Mr. Anderson was promoted to Chief Executive Officer and served in this position until December 1997. Mr. Anderson also served as the Chairman of the Board of Directors of Rose’s Stores, Inc. from August 1994 to December 1997.
George A. Bellino. Mr. Bellino has served as our President and Chief Merchandising Officer since December 2001 and has served as a director since April 1999. Mr. Bellino served as our Chief Executive Officer and President from April 1999 to December 2001. From June 1992 to December 1996, Mr. Bellino served as the Vice President of Merchandising at Pennsylvania Fashions, a privately held off-price apparel chain. From June 1990 to October 1991, Mr. Bellino served as President of General Textiles/ Family Bargain Center, a retail apparel chain.
Thomas W. Stoltz. Mr. Stoltz has served as our Chief Financial Officer since September 2000. From January 1999 to August 2000, Mr. Stoltz served as Chief Financial Officer of Sharon Luggage and Gifts, a privately held retailer. From August 1996 to December 1998, Mr. Stoltz served as the Chief Financial Officer and Vice President of Finance of Factory Card Outlet, a greeting card retailer. Mr. Stoltz is a certified public accountant licensed in North Carolina and a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.
James A. Dunn. Mr. Dunn has served as our Vice President of Store Operations since April 2001. From January to April 2001, Mr. Dunn was our Director of Training and Development and from January 2000 to January 2001 was one of our Regional Managers. Prior to joining us, Mr. Dunn was a Store Manager at Staples from January 1999 to December 2000. Prior to that Mr. Dunn was a Regional Manager at Dress Barn where he supervised 77 stores and 10 district sales managers with an annualized sales volume of $63.0 million.
Gregory P. Flynn. Mr. Flynn has served as our Chairman of the board of directors since 2001 and as a member of the compensation committee since 2001. Mr. Flynn is currently a Managing Partner of Hampshire Equity

42


Table of Contents

Partners II, L.P. and Hampshire Equity Partners III, L.P. and has been associated with Hampshire since 1996. Hampshire Equity Partners and certain of its affiliates are selling stockholders in this offering. From 1994 to 1996, Mr. Flynn served as a Managing Partner of ING Equity Partners, L.P.
Laurens M. Goff. Mr. Goff has served as a director since September 2003 and as a member of the audit committee. Mr. Goff is currently a Principal of Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P. and Hampshire Equity Partners III, L.P. and has been employed by Hampshire since August 1998. From 1996 to 1998, Mr. Goff served as an analyst of Furman Selz LLC.
John S. Lupo. Mr. Lupo has served as a director since May 2003, and is the Chairman of the compensation committee. Mr. Lupo is a principal in the consulting firm Renaissance Partners, LLC, which he joined in February 2000. From November 1998 until December 1999, Mr. Lupo served as Executive Vice President of Basset Furniture. From October 1996 until October 1998, Mr. Lupo served as the Chief Operating Officer of the International Division of Wal-Mart Stores Inc., and from September 1990 until September 1996, Mr. Lupo served as Senior Vice President and General Merchandise Manager of Wal-Mart Stores Inc. Mr. Lupo is a director for Rayovac Corp, a public reporting company, and serves on their Compensation and Corporate Governance and Nominating Committees.
Tracy L. Noll. Mr. Noll has served as a director since July 2000 and is the current Chairman of the audit committee. Mr. Noll is currently a private investor based in Dallas, Texas. He served as President and Chief Operating Officer of National Dairy Holdings, L.P. from April 2001 to September 2003. He served as Executive Vice President of Suiza Foods Corporation, a public reporting company, from September 1994 until March 2001, including serving as Chief Financial Officer from September 1994 until July 1997. He served as Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Morningstar Foods Inc., a public reporting company, from April 1988 until June 1994. Mr. Noll currently serves as a Director and is Chairman of the Audit Committee of Reddy Ice Group, Inc., a public reporting company. Mr. Noll also serves as a Director of Lakeview Farms Inc., a privately held company.
Each of our executive officers serves at the discretion of the board of directors and holds office until his successor is elected and qualified or until his earlier resignation or removal. There are no family relationships among any of our directors or executive officers.
Board of Directors Composition After the Offering
Our board of directors currently consists of six directors. Following this offering, our board of directors will be divided into three classes and will consist of five directors, three of which will be “independent” under the rules of the Nasdaq National Market, including Messrs. Anderson, Flynn, Noll and Lupo and the director nominee. Upon consummation of the offering, Mr. Flynn will be the only Hampshire Equity Partners nominated director. We intend to avail ourselves of the transition periods provided for under the applicable rules of the Nasdaq National Market for issuers listing in conjunction with their initial public offering. Although we ultimately intend to satisfy all Nasdaq corporate governance rules, immediately after the consummation of the offering, we intend to avail ourselves of the Nasdaq rule 4350(c) “controlled company” exception that applies to companies where more than 50% of the stockholder voting power is held by an individual, a group or another company due to Hampshire Equity Partners’ ownership interest and voting power described under “Principal and Selling Stockholders.” This rule will grant us an exception from the requirements that we have a majority of independent directors on our board of directors and that our compensation and nominating and corporate governance committees be comprised entirely of independent directors. However, we intend to comply with the independence rules of the Nasdaq National Market in the event Hampshire’s ownership falls below 50%.
Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation will divide our board into three classes having staggered terms, with one of such classes being elected each year for a new three-year term. Class I directors will have an initial term expiring in 2006, Class II directors will have an initial term expiring in 2007 and Class III directors will have an initial term expiring in 2008. Class I will be comprised of Mr.                     . Class II will be comprised of Messrs. Noll and Lupo. Class III will be comprised of Messrs. Flynn and Anderson.
In connection with this offering, we will enter into a nominating agreement with Hampshire Equity Partners pursuant to which we, acting through our nominating and corporate governance committee, will agree, subject to

43


Table of Contents

the requirements of our directors’ fiduciary duties, that (i) Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to designate two directors to be nominated for election to our board of directors as long as Hampshire Equity Partners owns in the aggregate at least 40% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering or (ii) Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to designate one director to be nominated for election to our board of directors as long as Hampshire Equity Partners owns in the aggregate less than 40% and at least 15% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering. If at any time Hampshire Equity Partners owns less than 15% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering, it will not have the right to nominate any directors for election to our board of directors. See “Related Party Transactions—Nominating Agreement.”
Board of Director Committees
Our board of directors has established an audit committee and a compensation committee. Upon the consummation of this offering, we will create a nominating and corporate governance committee.
Audit Committee
The audit committee, currently consisting of Messrs. Noll and Goff, reviews our internal accounting procedures and consults with and reviews the services provided by our independent registered public accountants. Mr. Noll is the current Chairman of the audit committee and qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert” for purposes of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, or the Exchange Act. Upon the consummation of this offering and after Mr. Goff’s anticipated resignation, we anticipate that our audit committee will consist of two independent directors, with Mr. Noll as the chairman. Following this offering, the principal duties and responsibilities of our audit committee will be to:
  •   have direct responsibility for the selection, compensation, retention, replacement and oversight of the work of our independent auditors, including prescribing what services are allowable and approve in advance all services provided by the auditors;
 
  •   set clear hiring policies for employees or former employees of the independent auditors;
 
  •   review all proposed company hires formerly employed by the independent auditors;
 
  •   have direct responsibility for ensuring its receipt from the independent auditors at least annually of a formal written statement delineating all relationships between the auditor and us, consistent with Independence Standards Board Standard No. 1;
 
  •   discuss with the independent directors any disclosed relationships or services that may impact the objectivity and independence of the auditor and for taking, or recommending that the full board of directors take, appropriate action to oversee the independence of the independent auditor;
 
  •   discuss with the internal auditors and the independent auditors the overall scope and plans for their respective audits including the adequacy of staffing, compensation and resources;
 
  •   review, at least annually, the results and scope of the audit and other services provided by our independent auditors and discuss any audit problems or difficulties and management’s response;
 
  •   review our annual audited financial statement and quarterly financial statements and discuss the statements with management and the independent auditors (including disclosures in our Exchange Act reports in response to Item 303, “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” of Regulation S-K);
 
  •   review and discuss with management, the internal auditors and the independent auditors the adequacy and effectiveness of our internal controls, including our ability to monitor and manage business risk, legal and ethical compliance programs and financial reporting;
 
  •   review and discuss separately with the internal auditors and the independent auditors, with and without management present, the results of their examinations;
 
  •   review our compliance with legal and regulatory independence;

44


Table of Contents

  •   review and discuss our interim financial statements and the earnings press releases prior to the filing of our quarterly reports on Form 10-Q, as well as financial information and earnings guidance provided to analysts and rating agencies;
 
  •   review and discuss our risk assessment and risk management policies;
 
  •   prepare an audit committee report required by the Securities and Exchange Commission to be included in our annual proxy statement;
 
  •   engage independent counsel and other advisors to assist the audit committee in carrying out its duties;
 
  •   review and approve all related party transactions consistent with the rules applied to companies listed on the Nasdaq National Market; and
 
  •   establish procedures regarding complaints received by us or our employees regarding accounting, accounting controls or accounting matters.
The audit committee will be required to report regularly to our board of directors to discuss any issues that arise with respect to the quality or integrity of our financial statements, our compliance with legal or regulatory requirements, the performance and independence of our independent auditors, or the performance of the internal audit function.
Compensation Committee
The compensation committee, consisting of Messrs. Lupo and Flynn, reviews and determines the compensation and benefits of all of our officers, establishes and reviews general policies relating to the compensation and benefits of all of our employees, and administers our long-term incentive plan. Upon the consummation of this offering, we anticipate that our compensation committee will consist of two independent directors, with Mr. Lupo as the chairman. Following this offering the principal duties and responsibilities of our compensation committee will be to:
  •   review and approve corporate goals and objectives relevant to our Chief Executive Officer’s and other named executive officers’ compensation;
 
  •   evaluate the Chief Executive Officer’s performance in light of these goals and objectives;
 
  •   either as a committee, or together with the other independent directors, determine and approve the Chief Executive Officer’s compensation;
 
  •   make recommendations to our board of directors regarding the salaries, incentive compensation plans and equity-based plans for our employees; and
 
  •   produce a compensation committee report on executive compensation as required by the Commission to be included in our annual proxy statements or annual reports on Form 10-K filed with the Commission.
Compensation Committee Interlocks and Insider Participation
Prior to establishing the compensation committee, the board of directors as a whole performed the functions delegated to the compensation committee. No member of our current compensation committee serves or has ever served as one of our officers or employees. None of our executive officers serves or has ever served as a member of the board of directors or compensation committee of any entity that has one or more executive officers serving on our board of directors or compensation committee.
Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee
Upon the consummation of this offering, we will create a nominating and corporate governance committee. We anticipate that our nominating and corporate governance committee will consist of two independent directors. We anticipate that the principal duties and responsibilities of our nominating and corporate governance committee will be to:
  •   identify individuals qualified to become board members, consistent with criteria approved by the board of directors;
 
  •   recommend the individuals identified be selected as nominees at annual meetings of our stockholders;

45


Table of Contents

  •   develop and recommend to the board of directors a set of corporate governance principles applicable to us; and
 
  •   oversee the evaluation of the board of directors and management.
Code of Ethics
Upon the consummation of this offering, we will adopt a written code of ethics applicable to our directors, officers and employees in accordance with the rules of the Nasdaq National Market and the Commission. Our code of ethics will be designed to deter wrongdoing and to promote:
  •   honest and ethical conduct;
 
  •   full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosure in reports and documents that we file with the Commission and in our other public communications;
 
  •   compliance with applicable laws, rules and regulations, including insider trading compliance; and
 
  •   accountability for adherence to the code and prompt internal reporting of violations of the code, including illegal or unethical behavior regarding accounting or auditing practices.
After this offering, we will make our code available on our website at www.cititrends.com.
Director Compensation
Our independent directors currently receive a $20,000 annual retainer and an annual award of options as compensation from us for their services as members of the board of directors. On March 10, 2004 each of Messrs. Lupo and Noll received options to purchase 100 shares of our common stock and such options are exercisable at an exercise price of $170 per share. We reimburse all of our directors for out-of-pocket expenses in connection with attendance at board of directors and committee meetings. After this offering, we expect that our independent directors will receive an annual fee of $          for serving as directors.
Executive Compensation
The following table sets forth a summary of the compensation paid during fiscal 2004 to our Chief Executive Officer and our four most highly compensated executive officers, together referred to as our named executive officers:
Summary Compensation Table
                                           
        Long-Term    
    Annual Compensation(1)   Compensation   All
        Securities   Other
Name and Principal Position   Fiscal Year   Salary   Bonus   Underlying Options   Compensation
                     
R. Edward Anderson
    2004     $ 327,693     $ 144,000       $619     $ 2,837  
  Chief Executive Officer                                        
George A. Bellino
    2004     $ 248,077     $ 114,000     $ 1,342     $ 2,525  
  President and Chief                                        
  Merchandising Officer                                        
Thomas W. Stoltz
    2004     $ 173,769     $ 40,000              
  Chief Financial Officer                                        
James A. Dunn
    2004     $ 140,769     $ 39,900             $885  
  Vice President of Store Operations                                        
 
(1)  Excludes perquisites and other benefits, which for each named individual are less than 10% of the sum of such individual’s annual salary and bonus.

46


Table of Contents

Stock Option Grants
The following table contains summary information regarding stock option grants made during fiscal 2004 by us to the named executive officers. We also granted stock options to purchase shares of common stock to certain of our employees and to our current stockholders, including Hampshire Equity Partners. All options were granted at fair market value of our common stock, as determine by our board of directors, on the grant date.
Option Grants In Last Fiscal Year
                                                 
                    Potential
                    Realizable Value
                    at Assumed
                    Rates of Stock
                    Price
        % of Total Options           Appreciation for
    Number of Securities   Granted to   Exercise       Option Term(1)
    Underlying Options   Employees in   Price Per   Expiration    
Name   Granted   Fiscal Year   Share   Date   5%   10%
                         
R. Edward Anderson
    12       0.3 %             10/30/14                  
George A. Bellino
    26       0.7 %             10/30/14                  
Thomas W. Stoltz
                                           
James A. Dunn
                                           
 
(1)  Potential realizable value is based upon the assumed initial public offering price of our common stock of $            . Potential realizable values are net of exercise price, but before taxes associated with exercise. Amounts representing hypothetical gains are those that could be achieved if options are exercised at the end of the option term. The assumed 5% and 10% rates of stock price appreciation are provided in accordance with rules of the Commission, based on the assumed initial public offering price of $        per share and do not represent our estimate or projection of the future stock price.
Year-End Option Values
The following table provides information about the number and value of unexercised options to purchase common stock held on January 29, 2005 by the named executive officers. There was no public market for our common stock on January 29, 2004. Accordingly, we have calculated the values of the unexercised options on the basis of an assumed initial public offering price of $           per share, less the applicable exercise price, multiplied by the number of shares acquired upon exercise. None of the named executive officers exercised any stock options in fiscal 2004.
Fiscal Year End Option Values
                                         
    Number of Securities Underlying    
    Unexercised Options at Fiscal Year   Value of Unexercised
    End   In-the-Money Options(1)
         
Name   Total   Exercisable   Unexercisable   Exercisable   Unexercisable
                     
R. Edward Anderson
    16,827       16,827                      
George A. Bellino
    13,904       13,904                      
Thomas W. Stoltz
    3,000       3,000                      
James A. Dunn
    2,500       1,975       525                  
                                     
      36,231       35,706       525                  
 
(1)  The options were granted under our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan. These options generally vest in equal installments over four years from the date of grant and are generally exercisable up to ten years from the date of grant. The fair value of the options granted during the year ended January 31, 2004 was $34.18 using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, with weighted average assumptions: no dividend yield; 50% expected volatility; 2.50% risk-free interest rate; ten year expected life and a 10% forfeiture rate.
2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan
Prior to the consummation of the offering, we anticipate that our board of directors and stockholders will adopt the 2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan to replace our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan. The 2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan will enable our key employees and directors to acquire and maintain stock ownership,

47


Table of Contents

thereby strengthening their commitment to our success and their desire to remain with us, focusing their attention on managing as an equity owner and aligning their interests with those of our stockholders. In addition, the plan is intended to attract and retain key employees, which, together with the key directors, we refer to collectively as eligible persons, and to provide incentives and rewards for superior performance that will ultimately lead to our profitable growth. The plan will be approved by our stockholders prior to the completion of this offering. As of                     , 2005, options to purchase up to            shares of our common stock remain outstanding under the option plan. Upon adoption of the new plan, the Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan will be terminated and no additional options will be granted under that plan.
The principal features of our incentive plan are described in summary form below.
Shares Subject to the Plan
The incentive plan provides that no more than                 shares of our common stock may be issued pursuant to awards under the incentive plan; provided that, in the aggregate, no more than 50% of the total shares of our common stock can be made the subject of an award other than as options under the incentive plan. These shares of our common stock will be authorized but unissued shares in such amounts as determined by the board of directors. However, the amount of shares of our common stock granted to an individual in any calendar year period can not exceed 5% of the total number of reserved shares of common stock. Also, in any calendar year period, the maximum dollar amount of cash or the fair market value of common stock that any individual can receive in connection with performance units can not exceed $2.5 million. The number of shares of our common stock available for awards, as well as the terms of outstanding awards, are subject to adjustment as provided in the incentive plan for stock splits, stock dividends, recapitalizations, mergers, consolidations, liquidations, changes in corporate structure and other similar events. Awards that may be granted under the incentive plan include stock options, stock appreciation rights (SARs), restricted shares, performance units, performance shares and director’s shares. Upon the granting of an award to an individual, the number of shares of common stock available shall be reduced depending on the type of award granted, as provided in the incentive plan.
The shares of our common stock subject to any award that expires, terminates or is cancelled, is settled in cash, or is forfeited or becomes unexercisable, will again be available for subsequent awards, except as prohibited by law.
Administration
Either our board of directors or a committee appointed by our board directors may administer the incentive plan. We refer to our board of directors and any committee exercising discretion under the incentive plan from time to time as the committee. With respect to decisions involving an award to a reporting person within the meaning of Rule 16a-2 under the Exchange Act, the committee is to consist of two or more directors who are disinterested within the meaning of Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act. With respect to decisions involving an award intended to satisfy the requirements of section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code, the committee is to consist solely of two or more directors who are “outside directors” for purposes of that code section. We currently expect that our compensation committee will administer the incentive plan.
Subject to the terms of the incentive plan, the committee has express authority to determine the eligible persons who will receive awards, when such awards will be granted, the number of shares of our common stock, units, or SARs to be covered by each award, the relationship between awards and the terms and conditions of awards. The committee has broad discretion to prescribe, amend, and rescind rules relating to the incentive plan and its administration, to interpret and construe the incentive plan and the terms of all award agreements, and to take all actions necessary or advisable to administer the incentive plan. Within the limits of the incentive plan, the committee may accelerate the vesting of any awards, allow the exercise of unvested awards, and may modify, replace, cancel, or renew them.
The incentive plan provides that the determination of the committee on all matters relating to awards and the incentive plan are final. The incentive plan also releases members of the committee from liability for good faith actions associated with the administration of the incentive plan.

48


Table of Contents

Eligibility
The committee may grant options that are intended to qualify as incentive stock options, which we refer to as ISOs, only to employees, and may grant all other awards to employees or any nonemployee director. The incentive plan and the discussion below use the term “grantee” to refer to an eligible person who has received an award under the incentive plan. Although the incentive plan provides the general provisions of our available awards, upon the determination by the committee of the type and amount of award to be granted to a grantee, the eligible grantee will enter into an agreement with us specifying the specific terms of the award to be granted. Each type of award (i.e., stock option, restricted share, performance units and performance shares) is governed by a separate agreement that describes the respective terms governing such award, such as the exercise date, term and expiration, restrictions, value, form and timing of payment.
Stock Options
Stock options granted under the incentive plan provide grantees with the right to purchase shares of our common stock at a predetermined exercise price. The committee may grant stock options that are intended to qualify as ISOs, or stock options that are not intended to so qualify, which we refer to as non-ISOs. The incentive plan also provides that ISO treatment may not be available for stock options that become first exercisable in any calendar year to the extent the value of the underlying shares that are the subject of the stock option exceed $100,000, based upon the fair market value of the shares of our common stock on the stock option grant date. Any ISO shall be granted within ten years from the earlier of the date the incentive plan is adopted by our board of directors or the date the incentive plan is approved by our stockholders.
Stock Appreciation Rights (SARs)
A SAR generally permits a grantee to receive, upon exercise, shares of our common stock equal in value to the excess of (i) the fair market value, on the date of exercise, of the shares of our common stock with respect to which the SAR is being exercised, over (ii) the exercise price of the SAR for such shares. The committee may grant SARs in tandem with stock options, or independently of them. The committee has the discretion to grant SARs to any eligible employee or nonemployee director.
Exercise Price for Stock Options and SARs
The exercise price of non-ISOs and SARs may not be less than 100% of the fair market value of our common stock on the grant date of the award. The exercise price of ISOs may not be less than 110% of the fair market value of our common stock on the grant date of the award for owners who own more than 10% of our shares of common stock on the grant date. For ISOs granted to other participants and for options intended to be exempt from Internal Revenue Code Section 162(m) limitations, the exercise price may not be less than 100% of the fair market value of our common stock on the grant date. With respect to stock options and SARs, payment of the exercise price may be made in any of the following forms, or combination of them: shares of unrestricted stock held by the grantee for at least six months (or a lesser period as determined by the committee) prior to the exercise of the option or SAR, based upon its fair market value on the day preceding the date of exercise, or through simultaneous sale through a broker of unrestricted stock acquired on exercise. The exercise price of any option and SAR must be determined by the committee no later than the date of grant of such option or SAR and the exercise price shall be paid in full at the time of the exercise.
Exercise and Term of Options and SARs
The committee will determine the times, circumstances and conditions under which a stock option or SAR may be exercisable. Unless provided otherwise in the applicable award agreement, each option or SAR shall be exercisable in one or more installments commencing on or after the first anniversary of the grant date; provided, however, that all options or SARs shall become fully vested and exercisable upon a change of control, as defined in the incentive plan. To the extent exercisable in accordance with the agreement granting them, a stock option or SAR may be exercised in whole or in part, and from time to time during its term, subject to earlier termination relating to a holder’s termination of employment or service as may be determined by the committee at the time of the grant. The term during which grantees may exercise stock options and SARs may not exceed ten years from the date of grant or five years in the case of ISOs granted to employees who, at the time of grant, own more than 10% of our outstanding shares of common stock; provided that, an option (excluding ISOs) may, upon the death

49


Table of Contents

of the holder of such option, be exercised for up to one year following the date of the holder’s death, even if the period extends beyond the ten year limit.
Options and SARs granted to nonemployee directors will be exercisable with respect to one-third of the underlying shares on each of the first, second and third anniversaries of the grant date and will have a term of not more than ten years. If a nonemployee director ceases to serve as a director, any option or SAR granted to such director shall be exercisable during its remaining term, to the extent that the option or SAR was exercisable on the date the nonemployee director ceased to be a director.
Restricted Shares
Under the incentive plan, the committee may grant restricted shares that are forfeitable until certain vesting requirements are met. For restricted shares, the incentive plan provides the committee with discretion to determine the per share purchase price of such shares, which can not be less than the minimum consideration (as defined in the incentive plan generally as the par value of a share of common stock), and the terms and conditions under which a grantee’s interests in such awards become vested. The incentive plan also provides the committee with discretion to determine whether the payment of dividends declared on the shares should be deferred and held by us until restrictions on the shares lapse, whether dividends should be reinveseted in additional shares of restricted shares subject to certain restrictions and terms, whether interest will be credited to the account of such holder for dividends not reinvested and whether dividends issued on the restricted shares should be treated as additional restricted shares. Payment of the purchase price for shares of restricted stock shall be made in full by the grantee before the delivery of such shares and, in any event, no later than ten days after the grant date for such shares. This payment may be made in cash or, with prior approval of the committee and subject to certain conditions, shares of restricted or unrestricted stock owned by the grantee. Under the incentive plan, the committee has discretion to provide in the award agreement that all or any portion of a grantee’s award of restricted shares shall be forfeited (a) upon the grantee’s termination of employment within a specified time period, (b) if specified performance goals are not satisfied by us or the grantee within a specified time period or (c) if any other listed restriction in the governing award agreement is not satisfied. If a share of restricted stock is forfeited, then the grantee shall be deemed to have resold such share to us at a specified price, we shall pay the grantee the amount due as soon as possible, but no later than 90 days after forfeiture, and the share of restricted stock shall cease to be outstanding.
Performance Awards
The incentive plan authorizes the committee to grant performance-based awards in the form of performance units and performance shares that are “performance compensation awards” that are intended to be exempt from Internal Revenue Code Section 162(m) limitations unless otherwise designated in the applicable award agreement. In either case, unless otherwise specified in the award agreement, upon the achievement, within the specified period of time, of the performance objectives, a performance unit shall be deemed exercised on the date on which it first becomes exercisable. Performance units are payable in cash or restricted stock, except that the committee may decide to pay benefits wholly or partly in stock delivered to the grantee or credited to a specified brokerage account. For performance shares, unless otherwise specified in the award agreement or by the committee, upon the achievement within the specified period of time of the performance objectives, grantees shall be awarded shares of restricted stock or common stock, unless the committee decides to pay cash in lieu of stock, based upon the number of percentage shares specified in the award agreement multiplied by the performance percentage achieved. The committee decides the length of performance periods, but the periods may not be less than one year nor more than 5 years. Any performance shares with respect to which the performance goals have not been achieved at the end of the performance period shall expire.
With respect to performance compensation awards, the incentive plan requires that the committee specify in writing the performance period to which the award relates, and an objective formula by which to measure whether and the extent to which the award is earned on the basis of the level of performance achieved with respect to one or more performance measures. Once established for a performance period, the performance measures and performance formula applicable to the award may not be amended or modified in a manner that would cause the compensation payable under the award to fail to constitute performance-based compensation under Internal Revenue Code Section 162(m).

50


Table of Contents

Under the incentive plan, the possible performance measures to be used by the committee for performance compensation awards include stock price, basic, earnings per share, operating income, return on equity or assets, cash flow, earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization, revenues, overall revenues or sales growth, expense reduction or management, market position, total income, return on net assets, economic value added, stockholder value added, cash flow return on investment, net operating profit, net operating profit after tax, return on capital and return on invested capital. Each measure will be, to the extent applicable, determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles as consistently applied by us, or such other standard applied by the committee and, if so determined by the committee, and in the case of a performance compensation award, to the extent permitted under Internal Revenue Code Section 162(m), adjusted to reflect the impact of specified corporate transactions, special charges, foreign currency effects, accounting or tax law changes and other extraordinary or nonrecurring events. Performance measures may vary from performance period to performance period, and from grantee to grantee, and may be established on a stand-alone basis, in tandem or in the alternative.
Tandem Awards
The committee may grant and identify any award with another award granted under the incentive plan, on terms and conditions set forth by the committee.
Income Tax Withholding
As a condition for the issuance of shares of our common stock pursuant to awards, the incentive plan requires satisfaction of any applicable federal, state, local, or foreign withholding tax obligations that may arise in connection with the award or the issuance of shares of our common stock.
Transferability
Unless set forth in the agreement evidencing the award, awards (other than an award of restricted stock) may not be assigned or transferred except by will or the laws of descent and distribution or, in the case of an option other than an ISO, pursuant to a domestic relations order as defined under Rule 16a-12 under the Exchange Act. An option may be exercised during the lifetime of the grantee only by that grantee or his or her guardian, legal representatives or, except as would cause an ISO to lose such status, by a bankruptcy trustee. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the committee may set forth in the agreement evidencing the award (other than an ISO) that the award may be transferred to an immediate family member, or related trust or related partnership. The terms of an award shall be final, binding and conclusive upon the beneficiaries, executors, administrators, heirs and successors of the grantee. Each share of restricted stock shall be non-transferable until such share becomes non-forfeitable.
Certain Corporate Transactions
With respect to any award which relates to stock, in the event of our liquidation or dissolution or merger or consolidation with another entity, the incentive plan and awards issued thereunder shall continue in effect in accordance with their terms, except that following any of these events either (a) each outstanding award shall be treated as provided for in the agreement entered into in connection with the event or (b) if not so provided in the agreement entered into in connection with the event, a grantee shall be entitled to receive with respect to each share of stock subject to the outstanding award, upon the vesting, payment or exercise of the award the same number and kind of stock, securities, cash, property, or other consideration that each holder of a share of stock was entitled to receive in connection with that certain event.
The applicable award agreement pertaining to each award shall set forth the terms and conditions applicable to such award upon a termination of employment of any grantee by us, which, except for awards granted to nonemployee directors, shall be as the committee may, in its discretion, determine at the time the award is granted or thereafter.
     Term of Plan; Amendments and Termination
The term of the incentive plan is ten years from                     , 2005, the date it was approved by our board of directors and stockholders, or at such earlier time as our board of directors may determine. Our board of directors may from time to time, amend or modify the incentive plan without the approval of our stockholders, unless stockholder approval is required (a) to retain ISO treatment under the Internal Revenue Code, (b) to permit

51


Table of Contents

transactions in stock under the incentive plan to be exempt from liability under Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act or (c) under the listing requirements of any securities exchange on which any of our equity securities are listed.
     Governing Law
Except where preempted by federal law, the law of the State of Georgia shall be controlling in all matters relating to the incentive plan, without giving effect to the conflicts of law principles thereof.
Employment Agreements
Set forth below are summaries of all of our employment agreements and arrangements with our named executive officers. The following summaries does not contain all of the terms of the agreements they summarize, and we refer you to the agreements, which are included as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part, for a complete understanding of the terms thereof. See “Where You Can Find More Information.”
Letter Agreement with R. Edward Anderson
In November 2001, we entered into a letter agreement with Mr. Anderson, pursuant to which Mr. Anderson was appointed our Chief Executive Officer and member of our board of directors.
     Compensation
The letter agreement provides that Mr. Anderson will receive an annual base salary of $300,000 (not including perquisites) and will be eligible to earn a bonus of up to 50% of his base salary. Mr. Anderson’s bonus is contingent upon our obtaining certain financial goals.
At the time he was hired, we granted Mr. Anderson options to purchase shares of our common stock. These options vest in equal amounts over four years, subject to accelerated vesting in the event that we reach targeted financial goals. In the event that Mr. Anderson is terminated for a reason other than “cause” (which term is not defined in the agreement), we may repurchase any or all of his vested options at “fair market value” as determined by our board of directors. In the event that Mr. Anderson is terminated for “cause”, any and all of his vested options will be cancelled. The agreement does not have a definite term, does not contain a noncompetition provision and does not provide for the treatment of unvested options held by Mr. Anderson at the time of his termination. The agreement provides that all of Mr. Anderson’s unvested options will vest upon a “change of control” (which term is not defined in the agreement).
     Severance
The letter agreement provides that in the event that Mr. Anderson is terminated for any reason other than for “cause,” he is entitled to severance pay of $150,000 to be paid in arrears over a period of six months.
Amended Employment and Non-Interference Agreement with George A. Bellino
     Term and Termination
In April 1999, we entered into an employment and non-interference agreement with Mr. Bellino, pursuant to which Mr. Bellino was appointed our Chief Executive Officer and President for a period of two years. In December 2001, we amended certain terms of this employment and non-interference agreement, one of which was to change Mr. Bellino’s position to Chief Merchandising Officer and President. Mr. Bellino’s amended agreement has a one year term and is automatically renewed for subsequent twelve-month periods subject to 90 days prior notice by either party. Mr. Bellino’s amended agreement provides that his employment may be terminated: (a) upon his death or disability, (b) by us for “cause” (described below), (d) by us for any reason other than those set forth in (a) or (b) or no reason, which the agreement defines as “no reason”, (e) by Mr. Bellino at will or (f) by Mr. Bellino if we do not satisfy our obligations under the agreement or materially reduce Mr. Bellino’s duties or change his title without consent, which the agreement defines as “reason.”
“Cause,” as defined in the agreement includes:
  •   conviction or guilty plea to a serious felony, a crime of moral turpitude or other specified financial offenses,
 
  •   a board determination that Mr. Bellino has committed a crime of moral turpitude,

52


Table of Contents

  •   a board determination that Mr. Bellino knowingly breach his fiduciary obligations to us, subject to notice and a cure period,
 
  •   Mr. Bellino’s failure to discharge his duties under the agreement or substance abuse which materially interferes with the discharge of his duties, subject to notice and a cure period,
 
  •   Mr. Bellino’s material violation of any non-competition or confidentiality agreement with us,
 
  •   Mr. Bellino’s material violation of any other personal obligations under his agreement, subject to notice and a cure period, and
 
  •   any other violation of law by Mr. Bellino that could have a material adverse effect on us, subject to notice and a cure period.
Mr. Bellino’s agreement provides that if he is terminated for any reason, he is entitled to receive all accrued and unpaid salary and benefits, reimbursement of expenses and continued medical coverage as legally required. In addition, in the event that Mr. Bellino is terminated (a) upon his death or disability, (b) by us for “no reason” or (c) by him with “reason,” then Mr. Bellino is entitled to receive payments, payable over a twelve-month period, equal to twelve months of his base salary on his termination date, subject to reduction for any compensation from other employment during such twelve-month period.
     Compensation
Under the agreement, Mr. Bellino receives an annual base salary of $215,000 (excluding perquisites), subject to review by the board, and is eligible for a bonus based on our performance. As provided in the agreement, Mr. Bellino’s bonus may be an amount equal to 35% of his base salary if we reach targeted financial goals. The agreement also provides for reimbursement of Mr. Bellino’s employment related expenses by us.
     Non-Interference and Non-Solicitation
During the term of his agreement and for a twelve-month period after his termination date, Mr. Bellino has agreed not to, without our consent:
  •   own, manage, operate, control, invest or acquire an interest in, or otherwise engage or participate in, whether as a proprietor, partner, stockholder, lender, director, officer, employee, joint venturer, investor, lessor, agent, representative or other participant, in any business which competes with us in any state where we operate.
 
  •   Recruit, solicit or otherwise induce or influence any proprietor, partner, stockholder, lender, director, officer, employee, sales agent, joint venturer, investor, lessor, customer, agent, representative or any other person with a business relationship with us to discontinue, reduce or modify their relationship with us.
Limitation of Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors
As permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, we have adopted provisions in our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated bylaws that limit or eliminate the personal liability of our directors for a breach of their fiduciary duty of care as a director. The duty of care generally requires that, when acting on behalf of the corporation, directors exercise an informed business judgment based on all material information reasonably available to them. Consequently, a director will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages or breach of fiduciary duty as a director, except for liability for:
  •   any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to us or our stockholders;
 
  •   any act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;
 
  •   any act related to unlawful stock repurchases, redemptions or other distributions or payment of dividends; or
 
  •   any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.
These limitations of liability do not affect the availability of equitable remedies such as injunctive relief or rescission. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation also authorizes us to indemnify our officers, directors and other agents to the full extent permitted under Delaware law.

53


Table of Contents

As permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, our amended and restated bylaws provide that:
  •   we may indemnify our directors, officers and employees to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, subject to limited exceptions;
 
  •   we may advance expenses to our directors, officers and employees in connection with a legal proceeding to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, subject to limited exceptions; and
 
  •   the rights provided in our bylaws are not exclusive.
At present, there is no pending litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors, officers, employees or agents in which indemnification by us is sought, nor are we aware of any threatened litigation or proceeding that may result in a claim for indemnification.

54


Table of Contents

Related Party Transactions
Management Consulting Agreement
We are a party to an Amended and Restated Management Consulting Agreement, or the consulting agreement, effective as of February 1, 2004 with Hampshire Management Company LLC, or the consultant, which is an affiliate of the selling stockholders, pursuant to which it provides us with certain consulting services related to, but not limited to, our financial affairs, relationships with our lenders, stockholders and other third-party associates or affiliates, and the expansion of our business.
     Term and Termination
The consulting agreement has a four year term and is subject to automatic one year renewals each February 1, subject to 60 days prior notice of termination by either party. In addition, either party has the right to terminate the consulting agreement upon 90 days prior notice in the event of (a) a sale of all or substantially all of our common stock or assets, (b) a merger or consolidation in which we are not the surviving corporation or (c) a registered public offering of our common stock, which includes this offering. It is expected that both parties to the consulting agreement will waive any notice requirement for termination upon consummation of this offering.
     Compensation
Under the consulting agreement, we pay the consultant an annual management fee of $240,000, payable in monthly installments. We have also agreed to indemnify the consultant, its affiliates and associates, and each of the respective owners, partners, officers, directors, members, employees and agents of each, from and against any loss, liability, damage, claim or expenses (including the fees and expenses of counsel) relating to their performance under the consulting agreement. We believe that the terms of the consulting agreement are comparable to those we could have obtained from an unaffiliated third party.
Upon the consummation of this offering, the parties shall terminate the consulting agreement and we will pay the consultant a termination fee of $1.2 million no later than December 31, 2005.
Stockholders Agreement
We are party to a Stockholders Agreement, dated as of April 13, 1999, or the stockholders agreement, with Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P., George Bellino and certain management stockholders. Pursuant to the stockholders agreement:
  •   four members of our board of directors may be designated by the owners of the majority of the voting stock beneficially owned by Hampshire Equity Partners and its affiliates,
 
  •   our stockholders have agreed generally not to transfer their shares,
 
  •   our management stockholders have been granted tag-along rights in the event of the sale of more than 50% of our common stock,
 
  •   our management stockholders have agreed to cooperate in any sale of the company by Hampshire Equity Partners, and
 
  •   we have agreed to register shares of our common stock held by the stockholder parties in the event that we register additional shares of our common stock under the Securities Act, other than on a registration statement on Form S-4 or S-8, or in connection with an exchange offer, merger, acquisition, dividend reinvestment plan, stock option or other employee benefit plan.
Pursuant to these rights under the stockholders agreement, Hampshire Equity Partners is entitled to include its shares of common stock in this registration statement, subject to the ability of the underwriters to limit the number of shares included in this offering. Under its terms, all of the provisions in the stockholders agreement will terminate upon consummation of this offering other than the registration rights described in the last bullet point above. In addition, we expect to terminate the stockholders agreement upon consummation of this offering.
Registration Rights Agreement
We expect to enter into a new registration rights agreement with Hampshire Equity Partners, who will hold                      shares of our common stock, or approximately           % of our shares of common stock on a fully

55


Table of Contents

diluted basis following the consummation of this offering. Pursuant to the terms and provisions of the new registration rights agreement, Hampshire Equity Partners will have the right from time to time, subject to certain restrictions, to cause us to register its shares of common stock for sale under the Securities Act on Form S-1 or, if available, on Form S-2, Form S-3 or any similar short-form registration statement. In addition, if at any time we register additional shares of common stock, Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to include its shares of common stock in the registration statement relating to that offering. If our subsequent registration is made pursuant to an underwritten offering, Hampshire Equity Partners must sell its registrable securities to the underwriters selected by us if they choose to participate in that registration.
Nominating Agreement
In connection with this offering, we will enter into a nominating agreement with Hampshire Equity Partners pursuant to which we, acting through our nominating and corporate governance committee, will agree, subject to the requirements of our directors’ fiduciary duties, that (i) Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to designate up to two directors to be nominated for election to our board of directors as long as Hampshire Equity Partners owns in the aggregate at least 40% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering or (ii) Hampshire Equity Partners will be entitled to designate one director to be nominated for election to our board of directors as long as Hampshire Equity Partners owns in the aggregate less than 40% and at least 15% of the shares of our common stock which it owned immediately prior to the consummation of this offering. If at any time Hampshire Equity Partners owns less than 15%, it will not have the right to nominate any directors for election to our board of directors.

56


Table of Contents

Principal and Selling Stockholders
The following table sets forth information known to us with respect to the beneficial ownership of our common stock as of March 31, 2005, and as adjusted to reflect the sale of                      shares of common stock by selling stockholders, by the following persons:
  •   each stockholder known by us to own beneficially more than 5% of our common stock;
 
  •   each of our directors and named executive officers;
 
  •   all directors and executive officers as a group; and
 
  •   each of the selling stockholders.
This table lists applicable percentage ownership based on                      shares of common stock outstanding as of March 31, 2005 (including options exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2005), and also lists applicable percentage ownership based on shares of common stock outstanding after completion of this offering. The information in the table is not adjusted for the        -for-one stock split of our common stock, which will occur simultaneously with the completion of this offering.
We have determined beneficial ownership in the table in accordance with the rules of the Securities and Exchange Commission. In computing the number of shares beneficially owned by a person and the percentage ownership of that person, we have deemed shares of common stock subject to options held by that person that are currently exercisable or will become exercisable within 60 days of March 31, 2005 to be outstanding, but we have not deemed these shares to be outstanding for computing the percentage ownership of any other person. To our knowledge, except as set forth in the footnotes below, each stockholder identified in the table possesses sole voting and investment power with respect to all shares of common stock shown as beneficially owned by that stockholder. Unless otherwise indicated, the address of all listed stockholders is c/o Citi Trends, Inc., 102 Fahm Street, Savannah, Georgia 31401.
                                         
            Number of        
    Number of       Shares   Percentage    
    Shares       Beneficially   of Shares   Percentage of
    Beneficially   Number of   Owned   Outstanding   Shares
    Owned Prior   Shares Being   After the   Before the   Outstanding After
Name of Beneficial Owner   to the Offering   Offered   Offering   Offering   the Offering
                     
Directors and Named Executive Officers:                                        
R. Edward Anderson
                                       
George A. Bellino
                                       
Thomas W. Stoltz
                                       
James A. Dunn
                                       
Tracy L. Noll
                                       
John S. Lupo
                                       
Gregory P. Flynn
                                       
Laurens Goff
                                       
Directors and executive officers as a group (eight persons)                                        
5% Stockholder:
                                       
Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P. (1)
                                       
 
(1)  The address of Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P. is 625 Madison Avenue, New York, New York 10022. Lexington Equity Partners II, L.P., or Lexington L.P., is the general partner of Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P. and has ultimate voting and investment control over our common stock. The general partner of Lexington L.P. is Lexington Equity Partners II, Inc., or Lexington Inc. Tracey Rudd, an employee of Hampshire Equity Partners, is the President of Lexington Inc. and Mr. Flynn, one of our directors, is the Vice President of Lexington Inc.

57


Table of Contents

Description of Capital Stock
General
Upon the completion of this offering, we will be authorized to issue                      shares of common stock, $0.01 par value per share, and shares of                     undesignated preferred stock, $0.01 par value per share. The following description of our capital stock does not purport to be complete and is subject to, and qualified in its entirety by, our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws, which we have included as exhibits to the registration statement of which this prospectus forms a part.
Common Stock
Dividend Rights. Subject to preferences that may apply to shares of preferred stock outstanding at the time, the holders of outstanding shares of common stock are entitled to receive dividends out of assets legally available at the time and in the amounts as our board of directors may from time to time determine.
Voting Rights. Each common stockholder is entitled to one vote for each share of common stock held on all matters submitted to a vote of stockholders. Cumulative voting for the election of directors is not provided for in our certificate of incorporation, which means that the holders of a majority of the shares voted can elect all of the directors then standing for election.
No Preemptive or Similar Rights. No holder of our common stock is entitled to preemptive rights to subscribe for any shares of capital stock and our common stock is not subject to conversion or redemption.
Right to Receive Liquidation Distributions. Upon our liquidation, dissolution or winding-up, the assets legally available for distribution to our stockholders are distributable ratably among the holders of our common stock and any participating preferred stock outstanding at that time, after payment of liquidation preferences, if any, on any outstanding preferred stock and payment of other claims of creditors. Each outstanding share of common stock is, and all shares of common stock to be outstanding upon completion of this offering will be, fully paid and nonassessable.
Preferred Stock
Upon the closing of this offering, no shares of, and no securities convertible into, our preferred stock will be outstanding.
Upon the closing of this offering, under our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation our board of directors will be authorized, subject to the limits imposed by the Delaware General Corporation Law, but without further action by our stockholders to issue shares of preferred stock in one or more series, to establish from time to time the number of shares to be included in each series, to fix the rights, preferences and privileges of the shares of each wholly unissued series and any of its qualifications, limitations and restrictions. Our board of directors can also increase or decrease the number of any series, but not below the number of shares of that series then outstanding, without any further vote or action by our stockholders.
Our board of directors may authorize the issuance of preferred stock with voting or conversion rights that adversely affect the voting power or other rights of our common stockholders. The issuance of preferred stock, while providing flexibility in connection with possible acquisitions, financings and other corporate purposes, could have the effect of delaying, deferring or preventing our change in control and may cause the market price of our common stock to decline or impair the voting and other rights of the holders of our common stock. We have no current plans to issue any shares of preferred stock.
Anti-Takeover Effects of Various Provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law and Our Second Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation and Our Amended and Restated By-laws
Provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law, our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated by-laws contain provisions that may have some anti-takeover effects and may delay, defer or prevent a tender offer or takeover attempt that a stockholder might consider in its best interest, including those attempts that might result in a premium over the market price for the shares held by stockholders.

58


Table of Contents

     Delaware Anti-Takeover Statute
We are subject to Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law. Subject to specific exceptions, Section 203 prohibits a publicly held Delaware corporation from engaging in a “business combination” with an “interested stockholder” for a period of three years after the time the person became an interested stockholder, unless:
  •   the business combination, or the transaction in which the stockholder became an interested stockholder, is approved by our board of directors prior to the time the interested stockholder attained that status;
 
  •   upon consummation of the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, the interested stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation outstanding at the time the transaction commenced, excluding those shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers and by employee stock plans in which employee participants do not have the right to determine confidentially whether shares held subject to the plan will be tendered in a tender or exchange offer; or
 
  •   at or after the time a person became an interested stockholder, the business combination is approved by our board of directors and authorized at an annual or special meeting of stockholders by the affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock that is not owned by the interested stockholder.
“Business combinations” include mergers, asset sales and other transactions resulting in a financial benefit to the interested stockholder. Subject to various exceptions, in general an “interested stockholder” is a person who, together with his or her affiliates and associates, owns, or within three years did own, 15% or more of the shares of the corporation’s outstanding voting stock. These restrictions could prohibit or delay the accomplishment of mergers or other takeover or change in control attempts with respect to us and, therefore, may discourage attempts to acquire us.
In addition, provisions of our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws, which are summarized in the following paragraphs, may have an anti-takeover effect.
Classified Board of Directors. Our amended and restated charter will divide our board into three classes having staggered terms, with one of such classes being elected each year for a new three-year term. Class I directors will have an initial term expiring in 2006, Class II directors will have an initial term expiring in 2007 and Class III directors will have an initial term expiring in 2008. Class I will be comprised of Mr.                     . Class II will be comprised of Messrs. Noll and Lupo. Class III will be comprised of Messrs. Flynn and Anderson.
Quorum Requirements; Removal of Directors. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides for a minimum quorum of one-third in voting power of the outstanding shares of our capital stock entitled to vote, except that a minimum quorum of a majority in voting power of the outstanding shares of our capital stock entitled to vote is necessary to hold a vote for any director in a contested election, the removal of a director or the filling of a vacancy on our board of directors. Directors may be removed only for cause by the affirmative vote of at least a majority in voting power of the outstanding shares of our capital stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors.
No Cumulative Voting. The Delaware General Corporation Law provides that stockholders are not entitled to cumulate votes in the election of directors unless provided for otherwise in a company’s certificate of incorporation. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation does not grant our stockholder cumulative voting rights.
No Stockholder Action by Written Consent; Calling of Special Meeting of Stockholders. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation generally prohibits stockholder action by written consent. It and our amended and restated by-laws also provide that special meetings of our stockholders may be called only by (1) the chairman of our board of directors or (2) our board of directors pursuant to a resolution approved by our board of directors or (3) our board of directors upon a request by holders of at least 50% in voting power of all the outstanding shares entitled to vote at that meeting.
Advance Notice Requirements for Stockholder Proposals and Director Nominations. Our amended and restated by-laws provide that stockholders seeking to bring business before or to nominate candidates for election as directors at an annual meeting of stockholders must provide timely notice of their proposal in writing to the corporate

59


Table of Contents

secretary. To be timely, a stockholder’s notice must be delivered or mailed and received at our principal executive offices not less than 90 nor more than 120 days in advance of the anniversary date of the immediately preceding annual meeting of stockholders. Our amended and restated by-laws also specify requirements as to the form and content of a stockholder’s notice. These provisions may impede stockholders’ ability to bring matters before an annual meeting of stockholders or make nominations for directors at an annual meeting of stockholders. Stockholder nominations for the election of directors at a special meeting must be received by our corporate secretary by the later of ten days following the day on which notice of the date of the special meeting was mailed or public disclosure of the date of the special meeting was made or 90 days prior to the date that meeting is proposed to be held and not more than 120 days prior to such meeting.
Limitations on Liability and Indemnification of Officers and Directors. The Delaware General Corporation Law authorizes corporations to limit or eliminate the personal liability of directors to corporations and their stockholders for monetary damages for breaches of directors’ fiduciary duties as directors. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation includes a provision that eliminates the personal liability of directors for monetary damages for actions taken as a director, except for liability:
  •   for breach of duty of loyalty;
 
  •   for acts or omissions not in good faith or involving intentional misconduct or knowing violation of law;
 
  •   under Section 174 of the Delaware General Corporation Law (unlawful dividends or stock repurchases); or
 
  •   for transactions from which the director derived improper personal benefit.
Our amended and restated by-laws provide that we must indemnify and advance expenses to our directors and officers to the fullest extent authorized by the Delaware General Corporation Law. We are also expressly authorized to, and do, carry directors’ and officers’ insurance for our directors, officers and certain employees for some liabilities. We believe that these indemnification provisions and insurance are useful to attract and retain qualified directors and executive officers.
The limitation of liability and indemnification provisions in our amended and restated by-laws may discourage stockholders from bringing a lawsuit against directors for breach of their fiduciary duty. These provisions may also have the effect of reducing the likelihood of derivative litigation against directors and officers, even though such an action, if successful, might otherwise benefit us and our stockholders. In addition, your investment may be adversely affected to the extent that, in a class action or direct suit, we pay the costs of settlement and damage awards against directors and officers pursuant to these indemnification provisions.
There is currently no pending material litigation or proceeding involving any of our directors, officers or employees for which indemnification is sought.
Authorized but Unissued Shares. Our authorized but unissued shares of common stock and preferred stock will be available for future issuance without your approval. We may use additional shares for a variety of corporate purposes, including future public offerings to raise additional capital, corporate acquisitions and employee benefit plans. The existence of authorized but unissued shares of common stock and preferred stock could render more difficult or discourage an attempt to obtain control of us by means of a proxy contest, tender offer, merger or otherwise.
Supermajority Provisions. The Delaware General Corporation Law provides generally that the affirmative vote of a majority in voting power of the outstanding shares entitled to vote is required to amend a corporation’s certificate of incorporation, unless the certificate of incorporation requires a greater percentage. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation provides that the following provisions in the second amended and restated certificate of incorporation may be amended only by a vote of two-thirds or more in voting power of all the outstanding shares of our capital stock entitled to vote:
  •   the prohibition on stockholder action by written consent;
 
  •   the ability to call a special meeting of stockholders being vested solely in (1) the chairman of our board of directors, (2) our board of directors pursuant to a resolution adopted by our board of directors and (3) our board of directors upon a request by holders of at least 50% in voting power of all the outstanding shares entitled to vote at that meeting;

60


Table of Contents

  •   the provisions relating to the classification of our board of directors;
 
  •   the provisions relating to the size of our board of directors;
 
  •   the provisions relating to the quorum requirements for stockholder action and the removal of directors;
 
  •   the limitation on the liability of our directors to us and our stockholders;
 
  •   the provisions granting authority to our board of directors to amend or repeal our by-laws without a stockholder vote, as described in more detail in the next succeeding paragraph; and
 
  •   the supermajority voting requirements listed above.
Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation grants our board of directors the authority to amend and repeal our by-laws without a stockholder vote in any manner not inconsistent with the laws of the State of Delaware or our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation.
In addition, our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and our amended and restated by-laws provide that the same provisions listed above and found in our amended and restated by-laws may be amended by stockholders representing no less than two-thirds of the voting power of all the outstanding shares of our capital stock entitled to vote.
Listing
We intend to list our common stock on the Nasdaq National Market under the trading symbol “CTRN.”
Transfer Agent and Registrar
Upon consummation of this offering, the transfer agent and registrar for the common stock will be American Stock Transfer and Trust Company. The transfer agent’s address is 59 Maiden Lane, New York, New York 10038.

61


Table of Contents

Shares Eligible for Future Sale
Immediately prior to this offering, there has been no public market for our common stock. Future sales of substantial amounts of common stock in the public market could adversely affect prevailing market prices. Furthermore, since only a limited number of shares will be available for sale shortly after the offering because of contractual and legal restrictions on resale described below, sales of substantial amounts of common stock in the public market after the restrictions lapse could adversely affect the prevailing market price and our ability to raise equity capital in the future.
Upon completion of this offering,         shares of common stock will be outstanding, assuming no exercise of currently outstanding and exercisable options. Of these shares, the shares sold in this offering, plus any additional shares sold upon exercise of the underwriters’ over-allotment option, will be freely transferable without restriction under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, unless they are held by our “affiliates” as that term is used under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder. The remaining                      shares of common stock held by existing stockholders are restricted shares. Restricted shares may be sold in the public market only if registered or if they qualify for an exemption from registration under Rules 144 or 701 promulgated under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, which rules are summarized below.
In general, under Rule 144 as in effect on the date of this prospectus, beginning 90 days after the effective date of this offering, our affiliates, or a person (or persons whose shares are aggregated) who has beneficially owned restricted shares (as defined under Rule 144) for at least one year, are entitled to sell within any three-month period a number of shares that does not exceed the greater of one percent of the then outstanding shares of common stock or the average weekly trading volume of the common stock on the Nasdaq National Market during the four calendar weeks immediately preceding the date on which notice of the sale is filed with the Commission.
Sales under Rule 144 are subject to requirements relating to the manner of sale, notice and the availability of current public information about us. A person (or persons whose shares are aggregated) who was not our affiliate at any time during the 90 days immediately preceding the sale and who has beneficially owned restricted shares for at least two years is entitled to sell such shares under Rule 144(k) without regard to the limitations described above.
Our employees, officers, directors or consultants who purchased or were awarded shares or options to purchase shares under a written compensatory plan or contract are entitled to rely on the resale provisions of Rule 701 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, which permits affiliates and non-affiliates to sell their Rule 701 shares without having to comply with the Rule 144 holding period restrictions, in each case commencing 90 days after the effective date of this offering. In addition, non-affiliates may sell Rule 701 shares without complying with the public information, volume and notice provisions of Rule 144.
In addition, we expect to file a registration statement on Form S-8 registering shares of common stock subject to outstanding stock options or reserved for issuance under our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan and 2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan. We expect to file this registration statement as soon as practicable after the consummation of this offering. Shares registered under this registration statement will, subject to Rule 144 volume limitations applicable to affiliates, be available for sale in the open market, unless such shares are subject to vesting restrictions with us or the lock-up agreements described below.
Lock-Up Agreements
Each of our officers and directors and substantially all other stockholders have agreed to a 180-day “lock up” with respect to                      shares of common stock and other of our securities that they beneficially own, including securities that are convertible into shares of common stock and securities that are exchangeable or exercisable for shares of common stock. We have also agreed to such a restriction. This means that, for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus (the “lock-up period”), subject to specified exceptions, we and such persons may not, directly or indirectly, offer, sell, pledge or otherwise dispose of these securities without the prior written consent of CIBC World Markets Corp. In addition, the lock-up period may be extended in the event that we release earnings or announce certain material news within specified time periods prior to the termination of the lock-up period. The restrictions in the lock-up agreements will not prevent such persons from transferring their

62


Table of Contents

shares or other securities as gifts, to members of their immediate family or to a trust for the benefit of themselves of member of their family or by will or intestacy, provided, in each case, that the transferee of such shares of other securities agrees to be locked-up to the same extent as the person from whom they received the shares.
Registration Rights
Pursuant to the registration rights agreement to be executed upon consummation of this offering, Hampshire Equity Partners has the right to demand registration of its shares and to include its shares in registration statements that we file after the consummation of this offering, subject to certain exceptions. See “Related Party Transactions—Registration Rights Agreement.”

63


Table of Contents

Underwriting
We and the selling stockholders will enter into an underwriting agreement with the underwriters named below. CIBC World Markets Corp., Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC, SG Cowen & Co., LLC and Piper Jaffray & Co. are acting as the representatives of the underwriters.
The underwriting agreement provides for the purchase of a specific number of shares of common stock by each of the underwriters. The underwriters’ obligations are several, which means that each underwriter is required to purchase a specified number of shares, but is not responsible for the commitment of any other underwriter to purchase shares. Subject to the terms and conditions of the underwriting agreement, each underwriter has severally agreed to purchase the number of shares of common stock set forth opposite its name below:
           
Underwriters   Number of Shares
     
CIBC World Markets Corp. 
       
Piper Jaffray & Co. 
       
SG Cowen & Co. 
       
Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC
       
         
 
Total
       
         
The underwriters have agreed to purchase all of the shares offered by this prospectus (other than those covered by the over-allotment option described below) if any are purchased. Under the underwriting agreement, if an underwriter defaults in its commitment to purchase shares, the commitments of non-defaulting underwriters may be increased or the underwriting agreement may be terminated, depending on the circumstances.
The shares should be ready for delivery on or about                     , 2005 against payment in immediately available funds. The underwriters are offering the shares subject to various conditions and may reject all or part of any order. The representatives have advised us and the selling stockholders that the underwriters propose to offer the shares directly to the public at the initial public offering price that appears on the cover page of this prospectus. In addition, the representatives may offer some of the shares to other securities dealers at such price less a concession of $           per share. The underwriters may also allow, and such dealers may reallow, a concession not in excess of $           per share to other dealers. After the shares are released for sale to the public, the representatives may change the offering price and other selling terms at various times.
We and the selling stockholders have granted the underwriters an over-allotment option. The underwriters may purchase up to                     of these additional shares from us and up to                     of these additional shares from the selling stockholders. This option, which is exercisable for up to 30 days after the date of this prospectus, permits the underwriters to purchase a maximum of                     additional shares to cover over-allotments. If the underwriters exercise all or part of this option, they will purchase shares covered by the option at the initial public offering price that appears on the cover page of this prospectus, less the underwriting discount. If this option is exercised in full, the total price to the public will be $          , the total proceeds to us will be $          and the total proceeds to the selling stockholders will be $          . The underwriters have severally agreed that, to the extent the over-allotment option is exercised, they will each purchase a number of additional shares proportionate to the underwriter’s initial amount reflected in the foregoing table.
The following table provides information regarding the amount of the discount to be paid to the underwriters by us and the selling stockholders:
                         
        Total Without   Total With Full
        Exercise of Over-   Exercise of Over-
    Per Share   Allotment Option   Allotment Option
             
Citi Trends, Inc. 
          $       $    
Selling Stockholders
                       
We estimate that the total expenses of the offering for us and the selling stockholders, excluding the underwriting discount, will be approximately $          . We have agreed to bear the expenses (other than underwriting discounts and commissions) of the selling stockholders in connection with this offering.

64


Table of Contents

We and the selling stockholders have agreed to indemnify the underwriters against certain liabilities, including liabilities under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
Each of our officers and directors and substantially all other stockholders have agreed to a 180-day “lock up” with respect to                      shares of common stock and other of our securities that they beneficially own, including securities that are convertible into shares of common stock and securities that are exchangeable or exercisable for shares of common stock. This means that for a period of 180 days following the date of this prospectus, (the “lock-up period”) subject to specified exceptions, such persons may not, directly or indirectly, offer, sell, pledge or otherwise dispose of these securities without the prior written consent of CIBC World Markets Corp. In addition, the lock-up period may be extended in the event that we release earnings or announce certain material news within specified time periods prior to the termination of the lock-up period. The restrictions in the lock-up agreements will not prevent such persons from transferring their shares or other securities as gifts, to members of their immediate family or to a trust for the benefit of themselves of member of their family or by will or intestacy, provided in each case, that the transferee of such shares of other securities agree to be locked-up to the same extent as the person from whom they received the shares.
We have agreed not to issue, sell or register (other than pursuant to a registration statement on Form S-8), or otherwise dispose of, directly or indirectly, any of our equity securities (or any securities convertible into, exercisable for or exchangeable for our equity securities), except for this offering and the issuance of equity securities pursuant to our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan or our 2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan, during the lock-up period without the consent of CIBC World Markets Corp. In the event that during the lock-up period, (A) any shares are issued pursuant to our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan or our 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan that are exercisable during the lock-up period or (B) any registration is effected pursuant to a registration statement on Form S-8 relating to shares that are exercisable during the lock-up period, we have agreed to obtain the written agreement of such grantee or purchaser or holder of such registered securities that, during the lock-up period, such person will not, without the prior written consent of CIBC World Markets Corp., offer for sale, sell, distribute, grant any option for the sale of, or otherwise dispose of, directly or indirectly, or exercise any registration rights with respect to, any shares of our common stock (or any securities convertible into, exercisable for, or exchangeable for any shares of our common stock) owned by such person.
The representatives have informed us that it does not expect discretionary sales by the underwriters to exceed five percent of the shares offered by this prospectus.
There is no established trading market for the shares. The offering price for the shares has been determined by us, the selling stockholders and the representative, based on the following factors:
  •   the history and prospects for the industry in which we compete;
 
  •   our past and present operations;
 
  •   our historical results of operations;
 
  •   our prospects for future business and earning potential;
 
  •   our management;
 
  •   the general condition of the securities markets at the time of this offering;
 
  •   the recent market prices of securities of generally comparable companies; and
 
  •   the market capitalization and stages of development of other companies which we and the representative believe to be comparable to us.
Rules of the Commission may limit the ability of the underwriters to bid for or purchase shares before the distribution of the shares is completed. However, the underwriters may engage in the following activities in accordance with the rules:
  •   Stabilizing transactions—The representative may make bids or purchases for the purpose of pegging, fixing or maintaining the price of the shares, so long as stabilizing bids do not exceed a specified maximum.
 
  •   Over-allotments and syndicate covering transactions—The underwriters may sell more shares of our common stock in connection with this offering than the number of shares than they have committed to purchase. This over-allotment creates a short position for the underwriters. This short sales position may involve either

65


Table of Contents

  “covered” short sales or “naked” short sales. Covered short sales are short sales made in an amount not greater than the underwriters’ over-allotment option to purchase additional shares in this offering described above. The underwriters may close out any covered short position either by exercising their over-allotment option or by purchasing shares in the open market. To determine how they will close the covered short position, the underwriters will consider, among other things, the price of shares available for purchase in the open market, as compared to the price at which they may purchase shares through the over-allotment option. Naked short sales are short sales in excess of the over-allotment option. The underwriters must close out any naked short position by purchasing shares in the open market. A naked short position is more likely to be created if the underwriters are concerned that, in the open market after pricing, there may be downward pressure on the price of the shares that could adversely affect investors who purchase shares in this offering.
  •   Penalty bids—If the representative purchases shares in the open market in a stabilizing transaction or syndicate covering transaction, they may reclaim a selling concession from the underwriters and selling group members who sold those shares as part of this offering.
Similar to other purchase transactions, the underwriters’ purchases to cover the syndicate short sales or to stabilize the market price of our common stock may have the effect of raising or maintaining the market price of our common stock or preventing or mitigating a decline in the market price of our common stock. As a result, the price of the shares of our common stock may be higher than the price that might otherwise exist in the open market. The imposition of a penalty bid might also have an effect on the price of the shares if it discourages resales of the shares.
Neither we nor the underwriters makes any representation or prediction as to the effect that the transactions described above may have on the price of the shares. These transactions may occur on the Nasdaq National Market or otherwise. If such transactions are commenced, they may be discontinued without notice at any time.
Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest), an affiliate of Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC, is the lender under our credit agreement and Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC is acting as an underwriter in this offering. As such, Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) has received and will continue to receive customary fees in connection with the credit agreement. In addition, in the future, certain of the underwriters or their affiliates, may provide us, from time to time, with other financial advisory or commercial or investment banking services, for which we expect they will receive customary fees and commissions.
Based on information provided to us by CIBC World Markets Corp. and Hampshire Equity Partners, a managing director of CIBC World Markets Corp., has an approximate 0.03% indirect interest in our Series A Preferred Stock and our common stock, through ownership of limited partnership interests in Hampshire Equity Partners. We do not expect the proceeds with respect to this indirect interest to exceed $          in the aggregate.
As set forth above under “Principal and Selling Stockholders,” Hampshire Equity Partners currently holds approximately      % of our common stock and after the offering will hold approximately      % of our common stock. Based upon this ownership interest, Hampshire Equity Partners is an “affiliate” of the company (as such term is defined under the Securities Act) and may be deemed to be an “underwriter” under the Securities Act. Certain other of our affiliates are also selling stockholders in this offering, including Messrs.                     , who are members of our management, and may similarly be deemed to be “underwriters” under the Securities Act.

66


Table of Contents

Legal Matters
The validity of the common stock offered hereby will be passed upon for us by Paul, Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP, New York, New York. DLA Piper Rudnick Gray Cary US LLP, Baltimore, Maryland, has represented the underwriters in this offering.
Experts
The financial statements of Citi Trends, Inc. as of January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004 and for the fiscal years ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003 have been included herein in reliance upon the report of KPMG LLP, independent registered public accounting firm, appearing elsewhere herein, and upon the authority of said firm as experts in accounting and auditing. The audit report refers to the adoption of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 150, “Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Both Liabilities and Equity.”
Where You Can Find More Information
We have filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission a registration statement on Form S-1 under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, for the common stock offered in this offering. In addition, upon completion of this offering, we will be required to file annual, quarterly and current reports, proxy statements and other information with the Securities and Exchange Commission. You may read and copy our registration statement and the attached exhibits and schedules without charge at the public reference room maintained by the Securities and Exchange Commission at 450 Fifth Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20549. Please call the Securities and Exchange Commission at 1 (800) SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference room. You may also inspect reports, proxy and information statements and other information that we file electronically with the Securities and Exchange Commission without charge at its Internet site, http://www.sec.gov.
This prospectus constitutes part of the registration and does not contain all of the information set forth in the registration statement. Whenever a reference is made in this prospectus to any of our contracts or other documents, the reference may not be complete and, for a copy of the contract or document, you should refer to the exhibits that are part of the registration statement.
After the offering, we intend to furnish our stockholders with annual reports containing financial statements audited by our independent registered public accountants.

67


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Index to Financial Statements
     
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AS OF AND FOR THE YEARS ENDED JANUARY 29, 2005,
JANUARY 31, 2004 AND FEBRUARY 1, 2003
  F-2
  F-3
  F-4
  F-5
  F-6
  F-7

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm
Board of Directors and Stockholders
Citi Trends, Inc.:
We have audited the accompanying balance sheets of Citi Trends, Inc. (the “Company”) as of January 29, 2005, and January 31, 2004, and the related statements of income, stockholders’ equity, and cash flows for the fiscal years ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
We conducted our audits in accordance with standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
In our opinion, the financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Citi Trends, Inc. as of January 29, 2005, and January 31, 2004, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the fiscal years ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003 in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.
As discussed in Note 2 to the financial statements, effective July 6, 2003 the Company adopted the provisions of the Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 150, “Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Both Liabilities and Equity”.
KPMG LLP
Jacksonville, Florida
March 30, 2005

F-2


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Balance Sheets
January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004
                     
    January 29,   January 31,
    2005   2004
         
Assets
Current assets:
               
 
Cash and cash equivalents
  $ 11,801,442     $ 9,954,232  
 
Inventory
    36,172,832       22,712,369  
 
Prepaid and other current assets
    2,600,933       1,770,998  
 
Deferred tax asset
    1,139,000       530,604  
                 
   
Total current assets
    51,714,207       34,968,203  
Property and equipment, net
    17,573,767       12,749,601  
Goodwill
    1,371,404       1,371,404  
Other assets
    130,182       123,992  
                 
   
Total assets
  $ 70,789,560       49,213,200  
                 
Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities:
               
 
Borrowings under revolving lines of credit
  $     $  
 
Accounts payable
    28,132,301       19,577,370  
 
Accrued expenses
    3,199,772       2,121,520  
 
Accrued compensation
    2,537,643       1,669,462  
 
Current portion of long-term debt
    78,953       74,762  
 
Current portion of capital lease obligations
    718,425       566,667  
 
Income tax payable
    2,455,247       331,342  
 
Layaway deposits
    252,791       133,028  
                 
   
Total current liabilities
    37,375,132       24,474,151  
Long-term debt, less current portion
    1,526,110       1,494,302  
Capital lease obligations, less current portion
    688,473       494,547  
Preferred shares subject to mandatory redemption
    3,984,763       5,160,313  
Deferred tax liability
    818,000       333,445  
Other long-term liabilities
    2,632,113       752,574  
                 
   
Total liabilities
    47,024,591       32,709,332  
                 
Stockholders’ equity:
               
 
Common stock, $0.01 par value. Authorized 500,000 shares;
363,875 and 363,275 shares issued in 2005 and 2004
    3,639       3,633  
 
Paid-in-capital
    4,120,894       4,011,601  
 
Retained earnings
    19,828,629       12,571,384  
 
Treasury stock, at cost; 6,375 and 5,775 shares in 2005 and 2004
    (164,550 )     (57,750 )
 
Subscription receivable
    (23,643 )     (25,000 )
                 
   
Total stockholders’ equity
    23,764,969       16,503,368  
                 
Commitments and contingencies (notes 9 and 10)
               
   
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity
  $ 70,789,560     $ 49,213,200  
                 
See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-3


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Statements of Income
Years Ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
                             
    Fiscal   Fiscal   Fiscal
    2004   2003   2002
             
Net sales
  $ 203,441,772     $ 157,198,306     $ 124,950,935  
Cost of sales
    127,307,594       98,145,216       77,806,541  
                         
   
Gross profit
    76,134,178       59,053,090       47,144,394  
Selling, general and administrative expenses
    63,593,731       48,844,888       38,759,624  
                         
   
Income from operations
    12,540,447       10,208,202       8,384,770  
Interest expense, including redeemable preferred stock dividend
    732,202       563,342       255,708  
                         
   
Income before provision for income taxes
    11,808,245       9,644,860       8,129,062  
Provision for income taxes
    4,551,000       3,726,914       3,101,237  
                         
   
Net income
  $ 7,257,245     $ 5,917,946     $ 5,027,825  
                         
Basic income per common share
  $ 19.95     $ 15.92     $ 12.95  
                         
Diluted income per common share
  $ 17.10     $ 13.77     $ 11.21  
                         
Average number of shares outstanding
                       
 
Basic
    363,825       363,275       363,275  
                         
 
Diluted
    424,463       420,060       419,510  
                         
See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-4


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Statements of Cash Flows
Years Ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
                                 
    Fiscal 2004   Fiscal 2003   Fiscal 2002
             
Operating activities:
                       
 
Net income
  $ 7,257,245     $ 5,917,946     $ 5,027,825  
 
Adjustment to reconcile net income to net cash provided by operating activities:
                       
   
Dividends on preferred shares subject to mandatory redemption
    324,450       189,263        
   
Depreciation and amortization
    4,871,682       4,032,602       3,014,549  
   
Deferred income taxes
    (123,841 )     161,883       541,742  
   
Loss on disposal of fixed assets
    80,719       23,396       93,189  
   
Interest on Subscription Receivable
    (9,643 )            
   
Noncash compensation expense
    103,299       123,273       161,882  
   
Changes in assets and liabilities:
                       
     
Inventory
    (13,460,463 )     (5,669,857 )     (2,110,472 )
     
Prepaid and other current assets
    (845,787 )     (577,991 )     374,919  
     
Income tax receivable
          195,068       60,795  
     
Other assets
    (29,334 )     (16,020 )     (39,294 )
     
Accounts payable
    8,554,931       6,108,110       1,956,945  
     
Accrued expenses and other long-term liabilities
    2,823,842       647,045       576,631  
     
Accrued compensation
    868,181       (247,906 )     880,225  
     
Income tax payable
    2,123,905       331,342        
     
Layaway deposits
    119,763       (28,761 )     (82,278 )
                         
       
Net cash provided by operating activities
    12,658,949       11,189,393       10,456,658  
                         
Investing activities:
                       
 
Purchase of property and equipment
    (8,631,233 )     (6,117,954 )     (5,926,622 )
                         
Financing activities:
                       
 
Fee paid for continuance of revolving line of credit
                (50,000 )
 
Borrowings under revolving line of credit
    37,716,044       26,295,521       133,369,853  
 
Repayments under revolving line of credit
    (37,716,044 )     (26,295,521 )     (137,059,791 )
 
Repayments on long-term debt and capital lease obligations
    (831,456 )     (942,054 )     (742,969 )
 
Proceeds from issuance of long-term debt
                1,680,000  
 
Payment of dividends on preferred shares subject to mandatory redemption
    (1,366,050 )            
 
Proceeds from payment of shareholder note receivable
    11,000              
 
Proceeds from sale of stock
    6,000              
                         
       
Net cash used in financing activities
    (2,180,506 )     (942,054 )     (2,802,907 )
                         
       
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents
    1,847,210       4,129,385       1,727,129  
Cash and cash equivalents:
                       
 
Beginning of period
    9,954,232       5,824,847       4,097,718  
                         
 
End of period
  $ 11,801,442     $ 9,954,232     $ 5,824,847  
                         
Supplemental disclosures of cash flow information:
                       
 
Cash paid for interest
  $ 518,557     $ 352,933     $ 255,708  
 
Cash paid for income taxes
  $ 2,550,938     $ 3,036,620     $ 2,498,700  
Supplemental disclosures of noncash activities:
                       
 
Dividends accrued on redeemable preferred stock
  $     $ 135,187     $ 327,713  
 
Purchases of property and equipment financed by entering into capital leases
  $ 1,106,338     $ 670,503     $ 660,012  
 
Insurance settlement not yet received related to loss of fixed assets and inventory related to store fire
          192,384        
See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-5


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Statements of Stockholders’ Equity
Years Ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
                                                                 
    Common Stock           Treasury Stock        
        Paid-in   Retained       Subscription    
    Shares   Amount   Capital   Earnings   Shares   Amount   Receivable   Total
                                 
Balance—February 2, 2002
    363,275       3,633       3,726,446       2,088,513       5,775       (57,750 )     (25,000 )     5,735,842  
Expense recorded in connection with issuance of stock options
                    161,882                                       161,882  
Accrued preferred stock dividends
                            (327,713 )                             (327,713 )
Net income
                            5,027,825                               5,027,825  
                                                                 
Balance— February 1, 2003
    363,275       3,633       3,888,328       6,788,625       5,775       (57,750 )     (25,000 )     10,597,836  
Expense recorded in connection with issuance of stock options
                    123,273                                       123,273  
Accrued preferred stock dividends
                            (135,187 )                             (135,187 )
Net income
                            5,917,946                               5,917,946  
                                                                 
Balance— January 31, 2004
    363,275       3,633       4,011,601       12,571,384       5,775       (57,750 )     (25,000 )     16,503,868  
Exercise of stock options
    600       6       5,994                                       6,000  
Expense recorded in connection with issuance of stock options
                    103,299                                       103,299  
Purchase of 600 shares of common stock in exchange for a 3 year note
                                    600       (106,800 )             (106,800 )
Interest recorded on subscription receivable
                                                    (9,643 )     (9,643 )
Payment received on subscription receivable
                                                    11,000       11,000  
Net income
                            7,257,245                               7,257,245  
                                                                 
Balance— January 29, 2005
    363,875       3,639       4,120,894       19,828,629       6,375       (164,550 )     (23,643 )     23,764,969  
                                                                 
See accompanying notes to financial statements.

F-6


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
(1)  Organization and Business
Citi Trends, Inc. (the “Company”) is a rapidly growing, value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories for the entire family. As of January 29, 2005, the Company operated 200 stores in Alabama, Arkansas, Florida, Georgia, Louisiana, Maryland, Mississippi, North Carolina, South Carolina, Tennessee, Texas, and Virginia.
(2)  Summary of Significant Accounting Policies
     (a)  Fiscal Year
The Company’s fiscal year ends on the Saturday closest to January 31 of each year. The years ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003 are referred to as fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively, in the accompanying financial statements. Fiscal years 2004, 2003 and 2002 are each comprised of 52 weeks.
     (b)  Cash and Cash Equivalents
For purposes of the balance sheets and statements of cash flows, the Company considers all highly liquid debt instruments with original maturities of three months or less to be cash equivalents.
     (c)  Inventory
Inventory is stated at the lower of cost (first-in, first-out basis) or market as determined by the retail inventory method less a provision for inventory shrinkage. Under the retail inventory method, the cost value of inventory and gross margins are determined by calculating a cost-to-retail ratio and applying it to the retail value of inventory. The Company believes the first-in first-out retail inventory method results in an inventory valuation that is fairly stated.
     (d)  Property and Equipment, net
Property and equipment are stated at cost. Equipment under capital leases is stated at the present value of minimum lease payments. Depreciation and amortization are computed using the straight-line method over the lesser of the estimated useful lives (principally three to five years for computer equipment and furniture, fixtures and equipment, five years for leasehold improvements, and 15 years for buildings) of the related assets or the relevant lease term, whichever is shorter.
     (e)  Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price over the fair value of assets acquired. The Company adopted the provisions of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 142, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets, as of February 3, 2002. Pursuant to SFAS No. 142, goodwill acquired in a purchase business combination and determined to have an indefinite useful life is not amortized, but instead tested for impairment at least annually. The Company performed this analysis at the end of fiscal 2004 and no impairment was indicated.
     (f)  Impairment of Long-Lived Assets
If facts and circumstances indicate that a long-lived asset, including property and equipment, may be impaired, the carrying value of long-lived assets is reviewed. If this review indicates that the carrying value of the asset will not be recovered as determined based on projected undiscounted cash flows related to the asset over its remaining life, the carrying value of the asset is reduced to its estimated fair value. Impairment losses in the future are dependent on a number of factors such as site selection and general economic trends, and thus could be significantly different from historical results. To the extent the Company’s estimates for net sales, gross profit and store expenses are not realized, future assessments of recoverability could result in impairment charges.

F-7


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
     (g)  Stock-Based Compensation
The Company applies the intrinsic-value-based method of accounting prescribed by Accounting Principles Board (“APB”) Opinion No. 25, Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees, and related interpretations including Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) interpretation (FIN) No. 44, Accounting for Certain Transactions involving Stock Compensation, an interpretation of APB Opinion No. 25, to account for its fixed-plan stock options. Under this method, compensation expense is recorded on the date of grant only if the current fair value of the underlying stock exceeds the exercise price. The Company recognizes the fair value of stock rights granted to non-employees in the accompanying financial statements. SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, and SFAS No. 148, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation— Transition and Disclosure, an amendment of FASB Statement No. 123, establishes accounting and disclosure requirements using a fair-value-based method of accounting for stock-based employee compensation plans. As permitted by existing accounting standards, the Company has elected to continue to apply the intrinsic-value-based method of accounting described above, and the Company has adopted only the disclosure requirements of SFAS No. 123, as amended. The following table illustrates the effect on net income for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 if the fair-value-based method had been applied to all outstanding and unvested awards in the period. Pro forma information regarding net income and net income per share is required in order to show our net income as if we had accounted for employee stock options under the fair value method of SFAS No. 123, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation, as amended by SFAS No. 148, Accounting for Stock-Based Compensation— Transition Disclosure. The fair values of options and shares issued pursuant to our option plan at each grant date were estimated using the Black-Scholes option pricing model.
                           
    2004   2003   2002
             
Net income, as reported
  $ 7,257,245     $ 5,917,946     $ 5,027,825  
Add stock-based employee compensation expense included in reported net income, net of tax of $39,791, $45,855 and $62,729, respectively
    63,508       77,415       99,153  
Deduct total stock-based employee compensation expense determined under fair-value-based method for all awards, net of tax of $86,829, $68,120 and $47,157, respectively
    (138,583 )     (114,997 )     (74,538 )
                         
 
Pro forma net income
  $ 7,182,170     $ 5,880,364     $ 5,052,440  
                         
As reported basic income per common share
  $ 19.95     $ 15.92     $ 12.15  
                         
Pro forma Basic Income per common share
  $ 19.74     $ 15.81     $ 13.01  
                         
As reported diluted income per common share
  $ 17.10     $ 13.77     $ 11.21  
                         
Pro forma Diluted Income per common share
  $ 16.92     $ 13.68     $ 11.27  
                         
     (h)  Revenue Recognition
Revenue from retail sales is recognized at the time of the sale, net of an allowance for estimated returns. The Company allows for returns up to 10 days after the date of sales and the estimate for returns is based on actual return activity 10 days after the period ends. Revenue from layaway sales is recognized when the customer has paid for and received the merchandise. If the merchandise is not fully paid for within 60 days, the customer is given a refund or store credit for merchandise payments made, less a re-stocking fee and a program service charge. Program service charges, which are non-refundable, are recognized in revenue when collected. All sales are from cash, check or major credit card company transactions. The Company does not offer company-sponsored customer credit accounts.

F-8


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
     (i)  Cost of Sales
Cost of sales includes the cost of inventory sold during the period, net of discounts and allowances; purchasing costs; transportation costs including inbound freight and internal transfer costs. Distribution center costs, advertising and promotional expenses are not considered a portion of cost of sales and are included as part of selling, general and administrative expenses.
     (j)  Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of Liabilities and Equity
The Company prospectively adopted SFAS No. 150, Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities and Equity. SFAS No. 150 establishes standards for the classification and measurement of certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. SFAS No. 150 also includes required disclosures for financial instruments within its scope. For the Company, SFAS No. 150 was effective for instruments entered into or modified after May 1, 2003 and otherwise effective as of February 1, 2004, except for mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. As such, the Company adopted the provisions of SFAS No. 150 for our Series A Preferred Stock on July 6, 2003 which required the Company to classify the Series A Preferred Stock as a liability on our balance sheet. The effective date of SFAS No. 150 has been deferred indefinitely for certain other types of mandatorily redeemable financial instruments. To illustrate the effect of SFAS No. 150 the following table shows net income if SFAS No. 150 had not been adopted for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002.
                           
    2004   2003   2002
             
Net income, as reported
  $ 7,257,245     $ 5,917,946     $ 5,027,825  
Add dividends on preferred shares subject to mandatory redemption
    324,450       189,263        
                         
 
Pro forma net income
  $ 7,581,695     $ 6,107,209     $ 5,027,825  
                         
     (k)  Earnings per Share
Earnings per common share amounts are based on the weighted average number of common shares outstanding and diluted earnings per share amounts are based on the weighted average number of common shares outstanding plus the incremental shares that would have been outstanding upon the assumed exercise of all dilutive stock options.
The following table provides a reconciliation of the earnings figures used to calculate earning per share and used in calculating diluted earnings per share for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002:
                           
    2004   2003   2002
             
Net income, as reported
  $ 7,257,245     $ 5,917,946     $ 5,027,825  
Subtract dividends on preferred shares subject to mandatory redemption
          135,188       324,450  
                         
 
Numerator for EPS Calculation
  $ 7,257,245     $ 5,782,758     $ 4,703,375  
                         

F-9


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
The following table provides a reconciliation of the number of average common shares outstanding used to calculate earning per share to the number of common shares and common share equivalents outstanding used in calculating diluted earnings per share for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002:
                         
    2004   2003   2002
             
Average number of common shares outstanding
    363,825       363,275       363,275  
Incremental shares from assumed exercises of stock options
    60,638       56,785       56,235  
                         
Average number of common shares and common stock equivalents outstanding
    424,463       420,060       419,510  
                         
For fiscal 2004 and 2002 there were no options outstanding to purchase shares of common stock excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share because of antidilution. For fiscal 2003, there was an immaterial number of options outstanding to purchase shares of common stock excluded from the calculation of diluted earnings per share because of antidilution.
     (l)  Advertising
The Company expenses all advertising expenditures as incurred. Advertising expense for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $1,164,701, $905,872 and $618,051, respectively.
     (m)  Operating Leases
We account for our store leases in accordance with SFAS No. 13, Accounting for Leases and other authoritative guidance. Rent expense for operating leases, which have escalating rentals over the term of the lease, is recognized on a straight-line basis over the initial term.
Certain of our leases contain tenant improvement allowances, rent holidays, rent escalation clauses and/or contingent rent provisions. Incentives, rent holidays and minimum rental expenses are recognized on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease based on the date of initial possession, which is generally the date the property is available to the Company to make improvements in preparation of its intended use.
For tenant improvement allowances, we record a deferred rent liability on the balance sheet and amortize the deferred rent over the term of the lease as a reduction to rent expense.
     (n)  Store Opening and Closing Costs
New and relocated store opening costs are charged directly to expense when incurred. When the Company decides to close or relocate a store, the Company records an expense for the present value of expected future rent payments, net of sublease income, in the period that a store closes or relocates.
     (o)  Income Taxes
Income taxes are accounted for under the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases and operating loss and tax credit carryforwards. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date.

F-10


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
     (p)  Use of Estimates
The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities and the disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
     (q)  Business Reporting Segments
The Company is a value-priced retailer of urban fashion apparel and accessories for the entire family. The Company’s chief operating decision maker reviews performance and the allocation of resources on a store by store basis. Because the Company operates one business activity and the level of review by the Company’s chief operating decision maker is on a store by store basis, the Company has determined that its operations are within one reportable segment. Accordingly, financial information on industry segments is omitted. All sales are to customers and assets are located within the United States.
     (r)  Other Comprehensive Income
The Company did not have any components of other comprehensive income for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002.
     (s)  Recently Issued Accounting Standards Not Currently Effective
In December 2004, the FASB issued SFAS No. 123 (revised 2004), Share-Based Payment. SFAS No. 123R establishes standards for the accounting for transactions in which an entity exchanges its equity instruments for goods and services. SFAS No. 123R focuses primarily on accounting for transactions in which an entity obtains employee services in share-based payment transactions. Under SFAS No. 123R, the Company, beginning in the third quarter of 2005, will be required to measure the cost of employee services received in exchange for an award of equity instruments based on the grant date fair value of the award (with limited exceptions). The cost will be recognized over the period during which an employee is required to provide services in exchange for the award.
Currently, the Company discloses the estimated effect on net income of these share-based payments in the notes to the financial statements. The estimated fair value (cost) of the share-based payments has historically been determined using the Black-Scholes pricing model. As of the date of this report, the Company had not calculated the cost of share-based payments using the various other methods allowed by SFAS No. 123R and has not yet decided on the method to be used upon implementation of this standard. The actual compensation cost resulting from share-based payments to be included in the Company’s future results of operations may vary significantly from the amounts currently disclosed in the notes to the financial statements.

F-11


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
(3)  Property and Equipment, Net
The components of property and equipment at January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004 are as follows:
                 
    January 29,   January 31,
    2005   2004
         
Land
  $ 810,000     $ 810,000  
Building
    1,340,000       1,340,000  
Leasehold improvements
    12,134,815       8,885,163  
Furniture, fixtures, and equipment
    13,660,714       9,000,105  
Computer equipment
    6,535,924       4,823,922  
                 
      34,481,453       24,859,190  
Accumulated depreciation and amortization
    16,907,686       12,109,589  
                 
    $ 17,573,767     $ 12,749,601  
                 
Depreciation expense for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 was $4,848,537, $4,011,456 and $2,999,666, respectively. Computer equipment held under capital leases and related accumulated depreciation was $4,466,372 and $3,103,821, respectively, at January 29, 2005 and $3,373,409 and $2,448,245, respectively, at January 31, 2004.
(4)  Revolving Lines of Credit
The Company has a revolving line of credit secured by substantially all of the Company’s assets pursuant to which the Company pays customary fees. This secured line of credit expires in April 2007. At January 29, 2005, the line of credit provided for aggregate cash borrowings and the issuance of letters of credit up to the lesser of $25,000,000 or the Company’s borrowing base (approximately $23,500,000 at January 29, 2005), as defined in the credit agreement. Borrowings under this secured line of credit bear interest at either the prime rate or the Eurodollar rate plus 2.25%, at the Company’s election, based on conditions in the credit agreement. Additionally, there is a letter of credit fee of 1.25% per annum on the outstanding balance of letters of credit. At January 29, 2005, there were no outstanding borrowings on the revolving line of credit, nor were there any outstanding letters of credit. Under the terms of the credit agreement, the Company is required to maintain a minimum tangible net worth. The Company was in compliance with this requirement at January 29, 2005.
In September 2003, the Company entered into an annual unsecured revolving line of credit with Bank of America that expires in June 2005. At January 29, 2005, the line of credit provided for aggregate cash borrowings up to $3,000,000. Borrowings under the credit agreement bear interest at the London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) plus 2.00%. At January 29, 2005, there were no outstanding borrowings on the unsecured revolving line of credit.
The Company borrows funds under these revolving lines of credit from time to time and subsequently repays such borrowings with available cash generated from operations.
(5)  Long-term Debt and Capital Lease Obligations
Capital Leases. The Company has capital lease obligations that finance the purchase of its computer equipment. These obligations have maturity dates ranging from March 2005 to December 2007. The interest rates on these obligations range from 7.2% to 11.5%. All of these obligations are secured by the computer equipment.

F-12


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
As of January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004, long-term debt and capital lease obligations consist of the following:
                 
    January 29,   January 31,
    2005   2004
         
Mortgage payable issued to finance purchase of land and building; payable in monthly installments of $14,913, including interest, through June 2007 with a balloon payment of $1,303,412 due July 2007; interest at a fixed rate of 6.80%; secured by land and building
  $ 1,496,121     $ 1,569,064  
Non-negotiable three year junior subordinated note payable on September 30, 2007 issued in exchange for 600 shares of common stock
    108,942        
Capital lease obligations issued to finance purchase of computer equipment; payable in monthly installments averaging approximately $68,092, $45,357 and $15,889 in 2005, 2006 and 2007, with maturity dates ranging from March 2005 to December 2007; interest at rates ranging from 7.2% to 11.5%; secured by computer equipment
    1,406,898       1,061,214  
                 
      3,011,961       2,630,278  
Less current portion of long-term debt and capital lease obligations
    797,378       641,429  
                 
    $ 2,214,583     $ 1,988,849  
                 
As of January 31, 2004, annual long-term debt and capital lease obligation maturities are as follows:
                 
    Long-term   Capital Lease
Fiscal Year   Debt   Obligations
         
2005
  $ 78,953     $ 801,112  
2006
    85,984       544,278  
2007
    1,440,126       182,639  
                 
      1,605,063       1,528,029  
Less portion attributable to future interest payments (at rates ranging from 7.2% to 11.5%)
          (121,131 )
                 
    $ 1,605,063     $ 1,406,898  
                 
(6)  Income Taxes
The provision for income taxes for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 consists of the following:
                           
    2004   2003   2002
             
Current:
                       
 
Federal
  $ 3,910,115     $ 2,987,496     $ 2,136,445  
 
State
    764,726       577,535       423,050  
                         
      4,674,841       3,565,031       2,559,495  
                         
Deferred:
                       
 
Federal
    (104,170 )     135,658       465,423  
 
State
    (19,671 )     26,225       76,319  
                         
      (123,841 )     161,883       541,742  
                         
    $ 4,551,000     $ 3,726,914     $ 3,101,237  
                         

F-13


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
Income tax expense computed using the federal statutory rate is reconciled to the reported income tax expense as follows for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002:
                           
    2004   2003   2002
             
Statutory rate applied to income before income taxes
  $ 4,014,803     $ 3,279,252     $ 2,763,881  
State income taxes, net of federal benefit
    491,736       385,794       329,584  
General business credits
    (182,000 )     (161,023 )     (117,004 )
Dividends on preferred stock
    110,313       66,240        
Other
    116,148       156,651       124,776  
                         
 
Provision for income taxes
  $ 4,551,000     $ 3,726,914     $ 3,101,237  
                         
The components of deferred tax assets and liabilities at January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004 are as follows:
                     
    2005   2004
         
Deferred tax assets:
               
 
Deferred rent amortization
  $ 518,531     $ 189,682  
 
Inventory capitalization
    850,156       572,515  
 
Vacation liability
    177,333       61,750  
 
Stock compensation
    171,477       129,071  
 
Other
    56,000       16,000  
                 
      1,773,497       969,018  
Deferred tax liabilities:
               
 
Book and tax depreciation differences
    (681,945 )     (188,881 )
 
Prepaid expenses
    (462,832 )     (309,464 )
 
Goodwill
    (170,652 )     (129,612 )
 
Other
    (137,068 )     (143,902 )
                 
      (1,452,497 )     (771,859 )
                 
   
Net deferred tax asset
  $ 321,000     $ 197,159  
                 
In assessing the realizability of deferred tax assets, management considers whether it is more likely than not that some portion or all of the deferred tax assets will not be realized. The ultimate realization of deferred tax assets is dependent upon the generation of future taxable income during the periods in which those temporary differences become deductible. Management considers the scheduled reversal of deferred tax liabilities, projected future taxable income, and tax planning strategies in making this assessment. Based upon the level of historical taxable income and projections for future taxable income over the periods in which the deferred tax assets are deductible, management believes it is more likely than not that the Company will realize the benefits of these deductible differences. As such, a valuation allowance for deferred tax assets was not considered necessary at January 29, 2005 and January 29, 2004.
(7)  Preferred Shares Subject to Mandatory Redemption
The Company’s Series A Preferred Stock is nonvoting and has liquidation and dividend preferences over the common stock. All outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock can be redeemed by the Company with board of director approval, and must be redeemed by April 2009 or earlier in the event of a change in control or the liquidation of the Company, at a price of $1,000 per share, plus accrued dividends. Dividends on Series A Preferred Stock are cumulative at the rate of 9% of the amount of capital contributed for such shares and are payable upon the earlier of a declaration by the board of directors or a change in control or liquidation of the Company. At January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004 the Company had accrued interest and dividends payable of

F-14


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
$379,763 and $1,555,313, respectively. During fiscal 2003, the Company’s board of directors adopted a resolution whereby the Company intends to begin repaying its Series A Preferred Stock and all dividends accrued thereon at a rate of $500,000 per quarter, beginning in the second quarter of fiscal 2004. In fiscal 2004 the Company paid dividends and interest of $1.5 million.
(8)  Stockholders’ Equity
     (a)  Stockholders Agreement
The Company is party to a Stockholders Agreement dated April 13, 1999 (the “Stockholders Agreement”) with Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P., George Bellino and certain management stockholders. Pursuant to the stockholders agreement, four members of the Company’s board of directors may be designated by the owners of the majority of the voting stock beneficially owned by Hampshire Equity Partners and its affiliates; the Company’s stockholders have agreed generally not to transfer their shares; the Company’s management stockholders have been granted tag-along rights in the event of the sale of more than 50% of our common stock; the Company’s management stockholders have agreed to cooperate in any sale of the company by Hampshire Equity Partners and the Company has agreed to register shares of the Company’s common stock held by the stockholder parties in the event that the Company registers additional shares of the Company’s common stock under the Securities Act, other than on a registration statement on Form S-4 or S-8, or in connection with an exchange offer, merger, acquisition, dividend reinvestment plan, stock option or other employee benefit plan.
     (b)  Equity Transactions with Officer
In December 2001, the Company issued options to an officer for 16,800 shares of common stock. Since the estimated fair market value of the Company’s common stock issued exceeded the exercise price of these options on the date of grant, the Company recognized charges to earnings during fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 of $44,627, $84,441 and $161,882, respectively. Additional charges related to these options of $17,721 will be recognized in fiscal 2005.
     (c)  Equity Transactions with Majority Stockholder
In August 2003, the Company’s board of directors adopted a plan whereby stock options are to be issued to the Company’s majority stockholder, as well as certain defined members of management, in amounts necessary to prevent the dilution of their ownership percentage as a result of the issuance of stock options to other employees of the Company. Options granted under this anti-dilution plan are to be issued at the estimated fair market value of the Company’s common stock on the date of grant and vest immediately. During fiscal 2004 and 2003, the Company issued stock options for 1,199 and 1,503 shares of common stock, respectively, under this anti-dilution plan, 1,137 and 1,425, respectively, of which were issued to its majority stockholder. Because the majority stockholder does not qualify as an employee, FASB Interpretation No. 44, “Accounting for Certain Transactions Involving Stock Compensation,” required the Company to recognize a charge to earnings during fiscal 2004 and 2003 of $58,672 and $38,832, respectively. The fair value of the vested options was determined using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model.
     (d)  Stock Options
In 1999, the Company established the 1999 Citi Trends, Inc. Stock Option Plan (the “Plan”). The Plan provides for the grant of incentive and nonqualified options to key employees and directors. The board of directors determines the exercise price of option grants. Option grants generally vest in equal installments over four years from the date of grant and are generally exercisable up to ten years from the date of grant. The Company has authorized up to 75,000 shares of common stock for issuance under the Plan.

F-15


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
A summary of option activity in the Plan for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 is as follows:
                                                 
    2004   2003   2002
             
        Wtd Avg       Wtd Avg       Wtd Avg
        Exercise       Exercise       Exercise
    Shares   Price   Shares   Price   Shares   Price
                         
Outstanding at beginning of period
    68,899     $ 20       66,496     $ 11       66,096     $ 10  
Granted
    4,799       176       7,403       99       1,800       54  
Exercised
    (600 )     10                          
Forfeited
    (1,500 )     87       (5,000 )     18       (1,400 )     10  
                                                 
Outstanding end of period
    71,598       29       68,899       20       66,496       11  
                                                 
Options exercisable end of period
    62,173     $ 18       55,024     $ 13       37,035     $ 10  
                                                 
At January 29, 2005 the range of exercise prices and weighted-average remaining contractual life of outstanding options was $10 to $178 and 6 years, respectively.
The following table summarizes the status of Company options exercisable at January 29, 2005 by exercise price:
                         
        Weighted Average    
    Number   Remaining   Number
Exercise Price   Outstanding   Contractual Life   Exercisable
             
$ 10
    59,696       5.4       57,621  
$ 50
    800       7.0       400  
$ 70
    400       7.5       100  
$ 94
    3,903       8.4       2,253  
$ 99
    1,000       8.6       250  
$116
    1,000       8.8       250  
$170
    1,400       9.2        
$177
    800       9.3        
$178
    2,599       9.6       1,199  
                       
      71,598               62,173  
                       
The fair value of options granted during the years ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003 was $65.02, $34.18 and $20.85, respectively, using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, with the following weighted average assumptions:
                         
    2005   2004   2003
             
Dividend yield
    0.00%       0.00%       0.00%  
Expected volatility
    50.00%       50.00%       50.00%  
Risk-free interest rate
    2.50%       2.50%       3.60%  
Expected life, in years
    10  years       10  years       10  years  
Forfeiture rate
    10.00%       10.00%       10.00%  

F-16


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
(9)  Commitments and Contingencies
The Company leases its stores under operating leases, which generally have an initial term of five years with a five-year renewal option. Future minimum rental payments under operating leases having noncancelable lease terms at January 29, 2005 are as follows:
           
Fiscal Year:    
     
2005
  $ 8,223,506  
2006
    7,318,638  
2007
    6,032,679  
2008
    4,706,191  
2009
    2,365,894  
Thereafter
    614,920  
         
 
Total future minimum lease payments
  $ 29,261,828  
         
Certain operating leases provide for fixed monthly rentals while others provide for rentals computed as a percentage of net sales. Certain operating leases provide for a combination of both fixed monthly rental and rentals computed as a percentage of net sales. Rental expense was $8,417,799, $6,363,257 and $4,787,768 for the fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002 (including $723,471, $794,444 and $539,090 of percentage rent), respectively.
The Company from time to time is involved in various legal proceedings incidental to the conduct of its business, including claims by customers, employees or former employees. The Company is currently the defendant in two putative collective action lawsuits commenced by former employees under the Fair Labor Standards Act. The plaintiff in each of the lawsuits is represented by the same law firm, and both suits are pending in District Court of the United States for the Middle District of Alabama, Northern Division. The plaintiffs in these cases are seeking unpaid compensation and benefits, liquidated damages, attorneys fees, costs and injunctive relief. Each of the cases is in its early stages, and the Company is in the process of evaluating the claims made. While the Company’s review of the allegations is preliminary, it believes that its business practices are, and were during the relevant periods, in compliance with the law. While the Company is unable to predict the outcome of these matters, it plans to defend these suits vigorously.
(10)  Related Party Transactions
The Company is a party to an Amended and Restated Management Consulting Agreement, or the consulting agreement, effective as of February 1, 2004 with Hampshire Management Company LLC, or the consultant, which is an affiliate of the Company’s majority shareholder, pursuant to which it provides the Company with certain consulting services related to, but not limited to, financial affairs, relationships with lenders, stockholders and other third-party associates or affiliates, and the expansion of the Company’s business.
Term and Termination
The consulting agreement has a four year term and is subject to automatic one year renewals each February 1, subject to 60 days prior notice of termination by either party. In addition, either party has the right to terminate the consulting agreement upon 90 days prior notice in the event of (a) a sale of all or substantially all of our common stock or assets, (b) a merger or consolidation in which we are not the surviving corporation or (c) a registered public offering of our common stock, which includes this offering. It is expected that both parties to the consulting agreement will waive any notice requirement for termination upon consummation of this offering.

F-17


Table of Contents

Citi Trends, Inc.
Notes to Financial Statements—(Continued)
January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003
Compensation
Under the consulting agreement, the Company pays the consultant an annual management fee of $240,000, payable in monthly installments. The Company agreed to indemnify the consultant, its affiliates and associates, and each of the respective owners, partners, officers, directors, members, employees and agents of each, from and against any loss, liability, damage, claim or expenses (including the fees and expenses of counsel) relating to their performance under the consulting agreement.
Upon the consummation of the Company’s IPO (see note 12), the Company intends to negotiate a termination of the consulting agreement and has tentatively agreed to pay the consultant a termination fee of $1.2 million before December 31, 2005.
Included in operating expenses are management fees of $240,000, $240,000 and $190,000 for fiscal 2004, 2003 and 2002, respectively.
(11)  Valuation and Qualifying Accounts
The following table presents amounts that have been reserved on the balance sheet.
           
    Inventory
    Shrinkage
    Reserve
     
Balance at February 2, 2002
  $ 806,367  
 
Additions charged to costs and expenses
    2,066,634  
 
Deductions
    (1,808,188 )
         
Balance at February 1, 2003
  $ 1,064,813  
         
 
Additions charged to costs and expenses
    2,541,749  
 
Deductions
    (2,672,235 )
         
Balance at January 31, 2004
  $ 934,327  
         
 
Additions charged to costs and expenses
    2,917,053  
 
Deductions
    (2,629,883 )
         
Balance at January 29, 2005
  $ 1,221,497  
         
Additions charged to costs and expenses is the result of anticipated inventory shrinkage. Deductions represent actual inventory shrinkage incurred from physical inventories taken during the fiscal year.
(12)  Subsequent Events
On February 28, 2005, the Company filed a Form S-1 with the Securities and Exchange Commission to register shares in an initial public offering (“IPO”). The IPO is expected to be consummated during the second quarter of 2005.
On March 8, 2005 the Company adopted the 2005 Long-Term Incentive Plan which will become effective upon the consummation of the initial public offering. Under the Incentive Plan, the Company has reserved 35,000 shares of Common Stock for the grant of stock options and other equity incentive awards.

F-18


Table of Contents

(CITITRENDS PICTURES)


Table of Contents

                                         Shares
(CITITRENDS LOGO)
Common Stock
 
PROSPECTUS
 
                    , 2005
CIBC World Markets
Piper Jaffray
SG Cowen & Co.
Wachovia Securities
 
You should rely only on information contained in this prospectus. No dealer, salesperson or other person is authorized to give information that is not contained in this prospectus. This prospectus is not an offer to sell nor is it seeking an offer to buy these securities in any jurisdiction where the offer or sale is not permitted. The information contained in this prospectus is correct only as of the date of this prospectus, regardless of the time of delivery of this prospectus or any sale of these securities.
Until                     , 2005 (25 days after the commencement of the offering), all dealers that buy, sell or trade the common stock may be required to deliver a prospectus, regardless of whether they are participating in the offering. This is in addition to the dealers’ obligation to deliver a prospectus when acting as underwriters and with respect to their unsold allotments or subscriptions.


Table of Contents

Part II
Information Not Required in Prospectus
Item 13. Other Expenses of Issuance and Distribution.
The following table sets forth the costs and expenses, other than underwriting discounts and commissions, payable by the registrant in connection with the sale of the securities being registered. All amounts are estimates except the SEC registration fee, the NASD fee and the Nasdaq National Market listing fee.
         
SEC Registration fee
  $ 6,767.75  
NASD filing fee
    6,250.00  
Nasdaq national market listing fee
    5,000.00  
Printing
    *  
Legal fees and expenses
    *  
Accounting fees and expenses
    *  
Transfer agent and registrar fees
    *  
Miscellaneous
    *  
Total
  $ *  
 
To be provided by amendment
Item 14. Indemnification of Directors and Officers.
As permitted by Section 102(b)(7) of the Delaware General Corporation Law, we have adopted provisions in our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated by-laws that limit or eliminate the personal liability of our directors for a breach of their fiduciary duty of care as a director. The duty of care generally requires that, when acting on behalf of the corporation, directors exercise an informed business judgment based on all material information reasonable available to them. Consequently, a director will not be personally liable to us or our stockholders for monetary damages or breach of fiduciary duty as a director except for:
  •   any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to us or our stockholders;
 
  •   any act or omission not in good faith or that involves intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law;
 
  •   any act related to unlawful stock repurchases, redemptions or other distributions or payment of dividends; or
 
  •   any transaction from which the director derived an improper personal benefit.
These limitations of liability do not affect the availability of equitable remedies such as injunctive relief or rescission. Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation also authorizes us to indemnify our officers, directors and other agents to the fullest extent permitted under Delaware law.
As permitted by Section 145 of the Delaware General Corporation Law, our amended and restated by-laws provide that:
  •   we may indemnify our directors, officers and employees to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, subject to limited exceptions;
 
  •   we may advance expenses to our directors, officers and employees in connection with a legal proceeding to the fullest extent permitted by the Delaware General Corporation Law, subject to limited exceptions; and
 
  •   the rights provided in our amended and restated by-laws are not exclusive.
Our second amended and restated certificate of incorporation, attached as Exhibit 3.1 hereto, and our amended and restated by-laws, attached as Exhibit 3.2 hereto, provide for the indemnification provisions described above and elsewhere herein. In addition, we have purchased a policy of directors’ and officers’

II-1


Table of Contents

liability insurance that insures our directors and officers against the cost of defense, settlement or payment of a judgment in some circumstances. These indemnification provisions may be sufficiently broad to permit indemnification of our officers and directors for liabilities, including reimbursement of expenses incurred, arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
The form of Underwriting Agreement, attached as Exhibit 1.1 hereto, provides for indemnification by the underwriters of us and our officers and directors for specified liabilities, including matters arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.
Item 15. Recent Sales of Unregistered Securities.
Set forth below in reverse chronological order is information regarding the number of shares of capital stock and options issued by us since                     , 2002. Also included is the consideration if any received by us for the securities.
There was no public offering in any such transaction and we believe that each transaction was exempt from the registration requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, by reason of Regulation D and Section 4(2) of the 1933 Act, based on the private nature of the transactions and the financial sophistication of the purchasers, all of whom had access to complete information concerning us and acquired the securities for investment and not with a view to the distribution thereof. In addition, we believe that the transactions described below with respect to the issuance of option grants and warrants to our employees and directors were exempt from registration requirements of the 1933 Act by reason of Rule 701 promulgated thereunder.
     Common Stock
In January 2004, a former employee of ours, resigned with 600 shares of vested stock options. The employee exercised his options in March 2004 pursuant to the provisions of our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan and we issued to him shares of our common stock. In September 2004, pursuant to the terms and conditions of our Amended and Restated 1999 Stock Option Plan, we repurchased the 600 shares of common stock from him for the then fair market value of the common stock. As consideration we issued him a non-negotiable three year junior subordinated note in the amount of $106,800. The common shares we repurchased are currently held by us in treasury stock.
     Options
In August 2003, our board of directors adopted a plan whereby stock options are to be issued to Hampshire Equity Partners, as well as other common stockholders, in amounts necessary to prevent the dilution of their ownership percentage as a result of the issuance of stock options to our other employees. Options granted under this anti-dilution plan are to be issued at the estimated fair market value of our common stock on the date of grant and vest immediately. During fiscal 2003, we issued stock options for 1,503 shares of common stock under this anti-dilution plan, 1,425 of which were issued to Hampshire Equity Partners. Because Hampshire Equity Partners does not qualify as an employee, FIN No. 44 required us to recognize a charge to earnings during fiscal 2004 of $38,832. The fair value of the vested options was determined using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model.

II-2


Table of Contents

Item 16. Exhibits and Financial Statement Schedules
(a)     Exhibits. The following exhibits are filed as part of this registration statement:
         
Exhibit No.   Description
     
  1.1     Form of Underwriting Agreement***
 
  3.1     Form of Second Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation***
 
  3.2     Form of Amended and Restated By-laws***
 
  4.1     Specimen certificate for shares of common stock, $.01 par value**
 
  5.1     Opinion of Paul, Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP**
 
  10.1     Letter Agreement by and between R. Edward Anderson and Citi Trends, Inc., dated November 16, 2001***
 
  10.2     Employment and Non-Interference Agreement by and between George Bellino and Citi Trends, Inc., dated as of April 13, 1999***
 
  10.3     Amendment No. 1 to the Employment and Non-Interference Agreement by and between George Bellino and Citi Trends, Inc., dated as of December 2001***
 
  10.4     The Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of April 2, 1999, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Allied Fashion, Inc.***
 
  10.5     First Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of June 28, 2000, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Allied Fashion, Inc.***
 
  10.6     Second Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of November 30, 2000, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Allied Fashion, Inc.***
 
  10.7     Third Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of January 2003, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Citi Trends, Inc.***
 
  10.8     Fourth Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of February 9, 2005, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Citi Trends, Inc.***
 
  10.9     Lease Agreement, dated as of September 30, 2004, by and between Meyer Warehouse, LLC, as landlord, and Citi Trends, Inc., as tenant***
 
  10.1 0   $3.0 Million Promissory Note of Citi Trends, Inc. payable to Bank of America issued on June 21, 2004***
 
  10.1 1   Form of 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan***
 
  10.1 2   Form of Nominating Agreement by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P.*
 
  10.1 3   Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of           , 2005, by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P.**

II-3


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit No.   Description
     
 
  10.1 4   Amended and Restated Hampshire Management Consulting Agreement, effective as of February 1, 2004 by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Management Company LLC*
 
  10.1 5   Termination Agreement, dated as of           , 2005, by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Management Company LLC**
 
  14.1     Citi Trends, Inc. Code of Business Conduct and Ethics**
 
  23.1     Consent of KPMG LLP*
 
  23.2     Consent of Paul Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)**
 
  24.1     Power of Attorney (included on the signature page hereto)***
 
     * Filed herewith.
 ** To be filed by amendment.
*** Previously filed.
Item 17. Undertakings.
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes to provide to the underwriters at the closing specified in the underwriting agreement, certificates in such denominations and registered in such names as required by the underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons of the registrant pursuant to the foregoing provisions, or otherwise, the registrant has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Act and is, therefore, unenforceable. In the event that a claim for indemnification against such liabilities (other than the payment by the registrant of expenses incurred or paid by a director, officer or controlling person of the registrant in the successful defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer or controlling person in connection with the securities being registered, the registrant will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and will be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
The undersigned registrant hereby undertakes that:
        (1)     For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the information omitted from the form of prospectus filed as part of this registration statement in reliance upon Rule 430A and contained in a form of prospectus filed by the registrant pursuant to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, shall be deemed to be part of this registration statement as of the time it was declared effective.
 
        (2)     For the purpose of determining any liability under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, each post-effective amendment that contains a form of prospectus shall be deemed to be a new registration statement relating to the securities offered therein, and the offering of such securities at that time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.

II-4


Table of Contents

Signatures
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, the Registrant has duly caused this Registration Statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized, in the City of New York, State of New York, on the 7th of April, 2005.
  CITI TRENDS, INC.
  By:  /s/ R. Edward Anderson
 
 
         R. Edward Anderson
         Chief Executive Officer (Principal Executive Officer)
  By:  /s/ Thomas W. Stoltz
 
 
         Thomas W. Stoltz
         Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)
Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, this Amendment No. 1 to the registrant’s registration statement has been signed by the following persons in the capacities and on the dates indicated.
         
Signature   Title   Date
         
 
/s/ R. Edward Anderson
 
R. Edward Anderson,
on behalf of himself as well as attorney-in-fact
  Chief Executive Officer (Principal Executive Officer)   April 7, 2005
 
/s/ Thomas W. Stoltz
 
Thomas W. Stoltz,
on behalf of himself as well as attorney-in-fact
  Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial and Accounting Officer)   April 7, 2005
 
*
 
George A. Bellino
  Director   April 7, 2005
 
*
 
Gregory P. Flynn
  Director   April 7, 2005
 
*
 
Laurens M. Goff
  Director   April 7, 2005
 
*
 
John S. Lupo
  Director   April 7, 2005
 
*
 
Tracy L. Noll
  Director   April 7, 2005
 
*By: /s/ R. Edward  Anderson
 
R. Edward Anderson
Attorney-in-Fact
       
 
*By: /s/ Thomas W. Stoltz
 
Thomas W. Stoltz
Attorney-in-Fact
       

II-5


Table of Contents

Exhibit Index
         
Exhibit No.   Description
     
  1.1     Form of Underwriting Agreement***
 
  3.1     Form of Second Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation***
 
  3.2     Form of Amended and Restated By-laws***
 
  4.1     Specimen certificate for shares of common stock, $.01 par value**
 
  5.1     Opinion of Paul, Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP**
 
  10.1     Letter Agreement by and between R. Edward Anderson and Citi Trends, Inc., dated November 16, 2001***
 
  10.2     Employment and Non-Interference Agreement by and between George Bellino and Citi Trends, Inc., dated as of April 13, 1999***
 
  10.3     Amendment No. 1 to the Employment and Non-Interference Agreement by and between George Bellino and Citi Trends, Inc., dated as of December 2001***
 
  10.4     The Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of April 2, 1999, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Allied Fashion, Inc.***
 
  10.5     First Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of June 28, 2000, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Allied Fashion, Inc.***
 
  10.6     Second Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of November 30, 2000, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Allied Fashion, Inc.***
 
  10.7     Third Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of January 2003, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Citi Trends, Inc.***
 
  10.8     Fourth Amendment to Loan and Security Agreement, dated as of February 9, 2005, by and between Congress Financial Corporation (Southwest) and Citi Trends, Inc.***
 
  10.9     Lease Agreement, dated as of September 30, 2004, by and between Meyer Warehouse, LLC, as landlord, and Citi Trends, Inc., as tenant***
 
  10.1 0   $3.0 Million Promissory Note of Citi Trends, Inc. payable to Bank of America issued on June 21, 2004***
 
  10.1 1   Form of 2005 Long Term Incentive Plan***
 
  10.1 2   Form of Nominating Agreement by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P.*
 
  10.1 3   Registration Rights Agreement, dated as of           , 2005, by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P.**
 
  10.1 4   Amended and Restated Hampshire Management Consulting Agreement, effective February 1, 2004, by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Management Company LLC*


Table of Contents

         
Exhibit No.   Description
     
 
  10.1 5   Termination Agreement, dated as of           , 2005, by and between Citi Trends, Inc. and Hampshire Management Company LLC**
 
  14.1     Citi Trends, Inc. Code of Business Conduct and Ethics**
 
  23.1     Consent of KPMG LLP*
 
  23.2     Consent of Paul Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP (included in Exhibit 5.1)**
 
  24.1     Power of Attorney (included on the signature page hereto)***
 
     * Filed herewith.
 ** To be filed by amendment.
*** Previously filed.

                                                                   EXHIBIT 10.12


                          FORM OF NOMINATING AGREEMENT


            THIS NOMINATING AGREEMENT (this "Agreement"), dated as of April __,
2005, is entered into by and between Citi Trends, Inc., a Delaware corporation
(the "Company"), and Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P., a Delaware limited
partnership ("Hampshire").

            WHEREAS, as of the date hereof and immediately prior to the
consummation of the Company's initial public offering of its common stock, par
value $.01 per share (the "Common Stock"), Hampshire owns in the aggregate
______________ shares (collectively, the "Shares") of Common Stock; and

            WHEREAS, Hampshire and the Company wish to make certain agreements
with respect to the nomination of candidates for election to the board of
directors of the Company, upon the terms and conditions set forth in this
Agreement.

            NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the mutual
covenants and considerations herein set forth, the receipt and sufficiency of
which are hereby acknowledged, the parties hereto hereby agree as follows:

            1. Board of Directors. The size of the Board of Directors of the
Company (the "Board") shall be established in accordance with the Certificate of
Incorporation and By-Laws of the Company. The members of the Board shall be
nominated and elected in accordance with the Certificate of Incorporation and
By-Laws of the Company, and the provisions of this Agreement. "Certificate of
Incorporation" shall mean the Second Amended and Restated Certificate of
Incorporation of the Company, as filed with the Secretary of State of the State
of Delaware and effective as of the date hereof, as the same may be amended from
time to time. "By-Laws" shall mean the Amended and Restated By-Laws of the
Company, effective as of the date hereof, as the same may be amended from time
to time.

            2. Staggered Board. The Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws of
the Company shall provide that the Board shall be divided into three classes, as
nearly equal in number as possible, as follows: (A) one class initially
consisting of one director ("Class I"), the initial term of which shall expire
at the first annual meeting of the stockholders to be held after the date
hereof; (B) a second class initially consisting of two directors ("Class II"),
the initial term of which shall expire at the second annual meeting of the
stockholders to be held after the date hereof and (C) a third class initially
consisting of two directors ("Class III"), the initial term of which shall
expire at the third annual meeting of the stockholders to be held after the date
hereof, with each class to hold office until its successors are elected and
qualified. At each annual meeting of the stockholders of the Company, the
successors of the members of the class of directors whose term expires at that
meeting shall be elected to hold office for a term expiring at the third
succeeding annual meeting of stockholders. On the date hereof, the Board shall
consist of: (i) _______________ in Class I, (ii) Tracy Noll and John Lupo in
Class II and (iii) R. Edward Anderson and Gregory Flynn in Class III.

            3. Designees. Upon expiration of the respective terms of the initial
Board members set forth in Section 2 above, and subject to the provisions of
Section 4 hereof, Hampshire shall have the right to designate individuals for
nomination for election to the Board as set forth below and the Company shall,
acting through its Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee, cause such
individuals to be nominated for election to the Board as set forth below;
provided that the Nominating and Corporate Governance Committee's obligations
under this Agreement are subject to the requirements of their fiduciary duties
as directors and the Delaware General Corporation Law.

                  (a) For so long as Hampshire (together with any of its
respective successors and permitted assigns) owns, in the aggregate, at least
forty percent (40%) of the Shares, Hampshire shall be entitled to designate two
persons for nomination for election to the Board; or

                  (b) For so long as Hampshire (together with any of its
respective successors and permitted assigns) owns, in the aggregate, less than
forty percent (40%), but at least fifteen percent (15%), of the Shares,
Hampshire shall be entitled to designate one person for nomination for election
to the Board.

            4. Mechanics of Designation.

                  (a) In order to nominate an individual for election to the
Board, Hampshire must submit to the Company a prior written notice at least
ninety (90) days prior to the date of the next scheduled annual meeting of the
Company's stockholders in accordance with the notice provisions set forth in
Section 11 hereof, which notice shall include (i) the name of the designee, (ii)
a current resume and curriculum vitae of the designee, (iii) a statement
describing the designee's qualifications and (iv) contact information for
personal and professional references. At least one hundred and twenty (120) days
prior to the date of such annual meeting of the Company's stockholders, the
Company shall provide Hampshire with written notice of the expected date of such
meeting in accordance with the notice provisions set forth in Section 11 hereof.

                  (b) At each meeting of the Company's stockholders at which the
directors of the Company are to be elected, the Company agrees to recommend that
the stockholders elect to the Board each designee of Hampshire nominated for
election at such meeting in accordance with the provisions of Section 3 above.

            5. Vacancies.

                  (a) At any time at which a vacancy shall be created on the
Board in any class as a result of the death, disability, retirement,
resignation, removal or otherwise of a designee of Hampshire and Hampshire
maintains the right to designate a person for nomination for election to the
Board, as specified in Section 3 above, Hampshire shall have the right to
designate for appointment by the remaining directors of the Company under the
Certificate of Incorporation an individual to fill such vacancy and to serve as
a director on the Board in such class.

                  (b) In connection with the foregoing, Hampshire must submit to
the Company written notice of such designee or designees in accordance with the
notice provisions set forth in


                                      -2-

Section 11 hereof, which notice shall include (i) the name of the designee, (ii)
a current resume and curriculum vitae of the designee, (iii) a statement
describing the designee's qualifications and (iv) contact information for
personal and professional references. The Company agrees to take such actions as
will result in the appointment to the Board as soon as practicable of any
individual so designated by Hampshire.

            6. Modification, Amendment, Waiver. No modification, amendment or
waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall be effective unless approved in
writing by the Company and Hampshire. The failure of any party at any time to
enforce any of the provisions of this Agreement shall in no way be construed as
a waiver of such provisions and shall not affect the rights of the party
thereafter to enforce the provisions of this Agreement in accordance with its
terms.

            7. Invalid or Unenforceable Provisions. Whenever possible, each
provision of this Agreement will be interpreted in such manner as to be
effective and valid under applicable law, but if any term or provision of this
Agreement is held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect under
any applicable law or rule in any jurisdiction, all other conditions and
provisions of this Agreement shall nevertheless remain in full force and effect
and this Agreement will be reformed, construed and enforced in such jurisdiction
as if such invalid, illegal or unenforceable provision had never been contained
herein. The parties further agree that any court of competent jurisdiction is
expressly authorized to modify any such unenforceable provision of this
Agreement in lieu of severing such unenforceable provision from this Agreement
in its entirety, whether by rewriting the offending provision, deleting any or
all of the offending provision, adding additional language to this Agreement, or
by making such other modifications as it deems warranted to carry out the intent
and agreement of the parties as embodied herein to the maximum extent permitted
by law. The parties expressly agree that this Agreement as so modified by a
court of competent jurisdiction shall be binding upon and enforceable against
each of them.

            8. Entire Agreement. Except as otherwise expressly set forth herein,
this document embodies the entire agreement and understanding between the
parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersedes and
preempts any prior understandings, agreements or representations by or between
the parties, written or oral, which may have related to the subject matter
hereof in any way.

            9. Binding Effect; Assignment. All of the terms of this Agreement
shall inure to the benefit of and shall be binding upon the Company and
Hampshire and their respective successors and permitted assigns; provided,
however, that this Agreement may not be assigned without the prior written
consent of the other party hereto.

            10. Remedies. The parties hereto will be entitled to enforce their
rights under this Agreement specifically (without posting a bond or other
security), to recover damages by reason of any material breach of any provision
of this Agreement and to exercise all other rights existing in their favor. The
parties hereto agree and acknowledge that money damages may not be an adequate
remedy for any breach of the provisions of this Agreement and that any party may
in its sole discretion apply to any court of law or equity of competent
jurisdiction for specific performance and/or injunctive relief in order to
enforce or prevent any violation of the


                                      -3-

provisions of this Agreement. In the event of any dispute involving the terms of
this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to collect reasonable
fees and expenses incurred by the prevailing party in connection with such
dispute from the other parties to such dispute.

            11. Notices. Any notice or other communication in connection with
this Agreement or the Shares shall be deemed to be delivered and received if in
writing (or in the form of a telex or telecopy) addressed as provided below (a)
when actually delivered, in person, (b) if telexed or telecopied to said
address, when electronically confirmed, (c) when delivered if delivered by
overnight courier or (d) in the case of delivery by mail, five (5) business days
shall have elapsed after the same shall have been deposited in the United States
mails, postage prepaid and registered or certified:

                  If to the Company, to:

                  Citi Trends, Inc.
                  102 Fahm Street
                  Savannah, Georgia 31401
                  Attention:  R. Edward Anderson
                  Facsimile:  (912) 443-3674

                  with a copy to:

                  Paul, Hastings, Janofsky & Walker LLP
                  75 East 55th Street
                  New York, New York  10022
                  Attention: William F. Schwitter, Esq.
                  Facsimile: (212) 319-4090

                  If to Hampshire, to:

                  Hampshire Equity Partners II, L.P.
                  520 Madison Avenue, 33rd Floor
                  New York, New York 10022
                  Attention:  Laurens M. Goff
                  Facsimile:  (415) 362-1192

            12. Term. The term of this Agreement shall terminate upon the
earlier to occur of: (i) the mutual consent in writing of the parties hereto or
(ii) the date on which Hampshire (together with any of its respective
successors and permitted assigns) owns, in the aggregate, less than fifteen
percent (15%) of the Shares.

            13. Governing Law; Submission to Jurisdiction. All questions
concerning the construction, validity and interpretation of this Agreement will
be governed by the internal laws of the State of Delaware, without giving effect
to principles of conflicts of law. The parties hereby irrevocably and
unconditionally consent to submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the State of Delaware or the United States of America located in the State of
Delaware for any actions, suits or proceedings arising out of or relating to
this Agreement and the


                                      -4-

transactions contemplated hereby (and the parties agree not to commence any
action, suit or proceeding relating hereto except in such courts), and further
agree that service of any process, summons, notice or documents by United States
registered mail to a party in accordance with Section 11 hereof shall be
effective service of process for any action, suit or proceeding brought against
such party in any such court and, absent any statute, rule or order to the
contrary, that each party shall have thirty (30) days from actual receipt of any
complaint to answer or otherwise plead with respect thereto. The parties hereby
irrevocably and unconditionally waive any objection to the laying of venue of
any action, suit or proceeding arising out of this Agreement or the transactions
contemplated hereby in the courts of the State of Delaware or the United States
of America located in the State of Delaware, and hereby further irrevocably and
unconditionally waive and agree not to plead or claim in any such court that any
such action, suit or proceeding brought in any such court has been brought in an
inconvenient forum.

            14. Descriptive Headings. The descriptive headings of this Agreement
are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute a part of this
Agreement.

            15. Counterparts. This Agreement may be executed in separate
counterparts each of which will be an original and all of which taken together
will constitute one and the same agreement.



                            (Signature Pages Follow)


                                      -5-

            IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement
on the day and year first above written.



                                    COMPANY:

                                    CITI TRENDS, INC., a Delaware corporation

                                    By:
                                         -------------------------------
                                         Name:  R. Edward Anderson
                                         Title: Chief Executive Officer


                                    HAMPSHIRE:

                                    HAMPSHIRE EQUITY PARTNERS II, L.P., a
                                    Delaware limited partnership

                                    By: Lexington Equity Partners II, L.P.,
                                    its General Partner

                                    By: Lexington Equity Partners Inc.,
                                    its General Partner

                                    By:
                                         -------------------------------
                                         Name:
                                         Title:


                         [Nominating Agreement]


                                                                   EXHIBIT 10.14

                              AMENDED AND RESTATED

                    HAMPSHIRE MANAGEMENT CONSULTING AGREEMENT

      THIS AMENDED AND RESTATED HAMPSHIRE MANAGEMENT CONSULTING AGREEMENT (this
"Agreement") is executed as of February 28, 2005 and is effective as of February
1, 2004 (the "Effective Date"), by and between HAMPSHIRE MANAGEMENT COMPANY LLC,
a Delaware limited liability company and affiliate of Hampshire Equity Partners
II, L.P. (the "Consultant") and CITI TRENDS, INC., a Delaware corporation (the
"Company").

                              W I T N E S S E T H:

      WHEREAS, the Company previously entered into a Management Consulting
Agreement with an affiliate of the Consultant, Lexington Equity Partners II,
L.L.C., on April 13, 1999 (the "Original Agreement");

      WHEREAS, Lexington Equity Partners II, L.L.C. has been dissolved;

      WHEREAS, the Company desires to retain Consultant to provide business and
financial advice to the Company and to amend and restate the Original Agreement;
and

      WHEREAS, the Consultant wishes to provide such business and financial
advice to the Company.

      NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the mutual covenants
and agreements herein set forth, the parties hereto do hereby agree follows:

      Section 1. The Company hereby retains the Consultant, through the
Consultant's own personnel or through personnel available to the Consultant, to
render consulting services from time to time to the Company and its subsidiaries
(whether now existing or hereafter acquired), in connection with their financial
and business affairs, their relationships with their lenders, stockholders and
other third-party associates or affiliates, and the expansion of their
businesses. Consultant shall render such services to the Company in good faith
and in accordance with professional standards and applicable law. Consultant
shall report directly to the Board of Directors of the Company (the "Board of
Directors") and, when appropriate in conjunction with management, shall prepare
reports and provide other documentation for review by the Board of Directors as
to its work on behalf of the Company. The Board of Directors shall in its sole
discretion determine the scope and breadth of the Consultant's responsibilities
and duties hereunder. The terms of this Agreement shall commence on the date
hereof and continue until February 1, 2009, unless extended, or sooner
terminated, as provided in Section 5 below. The Consultant's personnel shall be
reasonably available to the Company's Board of Directors, managers, auditors and
other personnel for consultation and advice to be rendered pursuant to this
Agreement, subject to Consultant's reasonable convenience and scheduling.
Services may be rendered at the Consultant's offices or at such other locations
selected by the Consultant as the Company and the Consultant shall from time to
time agree.

      Section 2. The Company shall pay the Consultant a management fee equal to
$240,000 per year from the Effective Date through the termination of this
Agreement. The Company shall pay the Consultant such management fee in monthly
installments on the last day of each month during the term of this Agreement.
The Company and the Consultant acknowledge and agree that all fees and other
amounts due and owing to the Consultant for all periods prior to the Effective
Date have been paid in full.

      Section 3. Subject to the approval of the Board of Directors, the Company
shall reimburse Consultant for reasonable out-of-pocket expenses and any
reasonable, direct, allocable costs incurred by the Consultant and its personnel
in performing services hereunder to the Company and its subsidiaries upon the
Consultant's rendering of a statement therefor, together with supporting data as
the Company shall reasonably require.

      Section 4. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Company shall not pay the
fees under Section 2 and such fees shall accrue pursuant to the second sentence
of this Section 4, if and to the extent expressly prohibited by the provisions
of any credit, stock, financing or other agreements or instruments binding upon
the Company, its subsidiaries or properties, if the Company has not paid cash
interest on any interest payment date or has postponed or not made any principal
payments with respect to any of their indebtedness on any scheduled payment
dates, or if the Company has not paid cash dividends on any dividend payment
date as set forth in its certificate of incorporation or as declared by its
Board of Directors, or has postponed or not made any redemptions on any
redemption date as set forth in its certificate of incorporation or any
certificate of designation with respect to its preferred stock, if any. Any
payments otherwise owed hereunder, which are not made for any of the
above-mentioned reasons, shall not be canceled but rather shall accrue, without
interest, and shall be payable by the Company promptly when, and to the extent,
that the Company is no longer prohibited from making such payments. This Section
4 will not, in any event, restrict or limit the Company's obligations under
Sections 3, 8 and 9 which will be absolute and not subject to set-off.

      Section 5. This Agreement shall be automatically renewed for successive
one (1) year terms starting February 1, 2008 unless either party hereto, within
sixty (60) days prior to the scheduled renewal date, notifies the other party as
to its election to terminate this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, this
Agreement may be terminated by not less than ninety (90) days' prior written
notice from the Company to the Consultant at any time after (a) substantially
all of the stock or substantially all of the assets of the Company are sold to
any entity unaffiliated with the Consultant and/or a majority of the Company's
stockholders immediately prior to such sale or (b) the Company is merged or
consolidated into another entity unaffiliated with the Consultant and/or a
majority of the Company's stockholders immediately prior to such merger and the
Company is not the survivor of such transaction, or (c) the consummation of a
public offering and sale of equity securities of the Company pursuant to an
effective registration statement under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended.

      Section 6. The Consultant shall have no liability to the Company on
account of (a) any advice which it renders to the Company, provided the
Consultant believed in good faith that such advice was useful or beneficial to
the Company at the time it was rendered, or (b) the Consultant's inability to
obtain financing or achieve other results desired by the Company or Consultant's
failure to render services to the Company at any particular time or from time to

time, (c) the failure of any transaction to meet the financial, operating or
other expectations of the Company. The Company's sole remedy for any claim under
this Agreement shall be termination of this Agreement.

      Section 7. Notwithstanding anything contained in this Agreement to the
contrary, the Company agrees and acknowledges that the Consultant, Hampshire
Equity Partners II, L.P., their respective affiliates, members, employees, and
directors (the "Hampshire Affiliates") intend to engage and participate in
acquisitions and business transactions outside of the scope of the relationship
created by this Agreement and the Hampshire Affiliates shall not be under any
obligation whatsoever (except to the extent that fiduciary duty principles under
Delaware corporate law may be applicable to individual directors and officers of
the Company) to make such acquisitions, business transactions or other
opportunities through the Company or offer such acquisitions, business
transactions or other opportunities to the Company.

      Section 8. The Company will, to the fullest extent permitted by applicable
law, indemnify and hold harmless the Consultant, its affiliates and associates,
each of the Hampshire Affiliates, and each of the respective owners, partners,
officers, directors, members, employees and agents of each of the foregoing (the
"Indemnified Parties"), from and against any loss, liability, damage, claim or
expenses (including the fees and expenses of counsel) arising as a result of or
in connection with this Agreement; provided, however, that the Company shall not
indemnify any of the Indemnified Parties for any losses, liabilities, damages,
claims or expenses arising as a result of the Consultant's breach (or alleged
breach) of its obligations under Section 10 of this Agreement.

      Section 9. Any payments paid by the Company under this Agreement shall not
be subject to set-off and shall be increased by the amount, if any, of any taxes
(other than income taxes) or other governmental charges levied in respect of
such payments, so that the Consultant is made whole for such taxes or charges.

      Section 10. (a) This Agreement sets forth the entire understanding of the
parties with respect to the Consultant's rendering of services to the Company.
This Agreement may not be modified, waived, terminated or amended except
expressly by an instrument in writing signed by the Consultant and the Company.

            (b) This Agreement may be assigned by either party hereto without
the consent of the other party, provided, however, such assignment shall not
relieve such party from its obligations hereunder. Any assignment of this
Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties and
their respective successors and assigns.

            (c) In the event that any provision of this Agreement shall be held
to be void or unenforceable in whole or in part, the remaining provisions of
this Agreement and the remaining portion of any provision held void or
unenforceable in part shall continue in full force and effect.

            (d) Except as otherwise specifically provided herein, notice given
hereunder shall be deemed sufficient if delivered personally or sent by
registered or certified mail to the

address of the party for whom intended at the principal executive offices of
such party, or at such other address as such party may hereinafter specify by
written notice to the other party.

            (e) If at any time after the date upon which this Agreement is
executed, the Company acquires or creates one or more subsidiary corporations (a
"Subsequent Subsidiary"), the Company shall cause such Subsequent Subsidiary to
be subject to this Agreement and all references herein to the Company's "direct
and indirect subsidiaries" shall be interpreted to include all Subsequent
Subsidiaries.

            (f) Each subsidiary of the Company shall be jointly and severally
liable and obligated hereunder with respect to each obligation, responsibility
and liability of the Company as if a direct obligation of such subsidiary.

            (g) No waiver by either party of any breach of any provision of this
Agreement shall be deemed a continuing waiver or a waiver of any preceding or
succeeding breach of such provision or of any other provision herein contained.

            (h) The Consultant and its personnel shall, for purposes of this
Agreement, be independent contractors with respect to the Company.

            (i) This Agreement shall be governed by the internal laws (and not
the law of conflicts) of the State of New York.

      Section 11. The parties shall keep the terms of this Agreement strictly
confidential and shall not reveal them to any person, except as may be necessary
in any proceeding to enforce the terms of this Agreement or as consented to by
the parties hereto.

      Section 12. This Agreement supersedes all prior agreements between the
parties in the entirety with respect to the subject matter hereof, including the
terms of the Original Agreement, and no agreements or representations, oral or
otherwise, express or implied, with respect to the subject matter hereof have
been made by either party which are not set forth expressly in this Agreement.

                            [Signature Page Follows]

                                                           [Hampshire Management
                                                           Consulting Agreement]

      IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of
the day and year first above written.



                                   HAMPSHIRE MANAGEMENT COMPANY LLC,
                                   a Delaware limited liability company


                                   By: /s/ Thomas J. Walker
                                       -------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Thomas J. Walker
                                       Title: Vice President



                                   CITI TRENDS, INC., a Delaware corporation


                                   By: /s/ Thomas W. Stoltz
                                       -------------------------------------
                                       Name:  Thomas W. Stoltz
                                       Title: Chief Financial Officer




                                                                    Exhibit 23.1



            CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

Board of Directors and Stockholders
Citi Trends, Inc.:


We consent to the use of our report dated March 30, 2005, with respect to the
balance sheets of Citi Trends, Inc. as of January 29, 2005 and January 31, 2004,
and the related statements of income, stockholders' equity, and cash flows for
the years ended January 29, 2005, January 31, 2004 and February 1, 2003,
incorporated herein by reference and to the reference to our firm under the
heading "Experts" in the prospectus.

Our report refers to the adoption of Statement of Financial Accounting
Standards No. 150, "Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with
Characteristics of Both Liabilities and Equity".



KPMG LLP

Jacksonville, Florida
April 6, 2005

April 7, 2005

VIA EDGAR AND U.S. MAIL

Securities and Exchange Commission
Division of Corporate Finance
450 Fifth Street, N.W.
Mail Stop 0308
Washington, D.C. 20549
Attn: H. Christopher Owings, Assistant Director



      RE:   CITI TRENDS, INC.
            REGISTRATION STATEMENT ON FORM S-1
            INITIALLY FILED FEBRUARY 28, 2005
            FILE NO. 333-123028

Dear Mr. Owings:

      On behalf of Citi Trends, Inc., a Delaware corporation (the "Company"), we
hereby submit three copies of the Company's responses to the Staff's comments
conveyed in a letter to the Company dated March 28, 2005 in connection with the
Staff's review of the Company's Registration Statement on Form S-1 initially
filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (the "Commission") on February
28, 2005 (the "Registration Statement").

      This letter is submitted along with four copies of Amendment No. 1 to Form
S-1 Registration Statement ("Amendment No. 1"). All such copies have been marked
to show changes from the Registration Statement. Amendment No. 1 was transmitted
for filing with the Commission as of the date hereof.

      Capitalized terms used herein and not otherwise defined have the meanings
specified in the Registration Statement. For your convenience, we have repeated
each of the Staff's comments in bold prior to the Company's response. Unless
otherwise indicated, all page number references in the responses below are to
the internal pages of Amendment No. 1.

PART I

General

      1.    PLEASE FILE ALL REQUIRED EXHIBITS IN A TIMELY MANNER SO THAT WE MAY
            HAVE SUFFICIENT TIME TO REVIEW THEM BEFORE YOU REQUEST EFFECTIVENESS
            OF YOUR REGISTRATION STATEMENT. ALSO, PLEASE CONFIRM THAT ANY
            PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 2


            YOU CIRCULATE WILL DISCLOSE ALL NON-RULE 430A INFORMATION, INCLUDING
            THE PRICE RANGE AND RELATED INFORMATION BASED ON A BONA FIDE
            ESTIMATE OF THE PUBLIC OFFERING PRICE WITHIN THAT RANGE.

            The Company will comply with the Staff's comment and provide all
            required exhibits in a timely manner before requesting effectiveness
            of the Registration Statement. The Company has filed several
            additional exhibits with Amendment No. 1 and will file the remaining
            exhibits in a subsequent amendment.

            The Company is currently establishing the price range and the
            offering price with the underwriters. Upon agreeing on a price range
            with the underwriters, the Company will file a subsequent amendment
            to revise the disclosure to include the price range and the per
            share data in the prospectus. The Company confirms that any
            preliminary prospectus that is circulated will disclose all non-Rule
            430A information, including the price range and the related
            information based on a bona fide estimate of the public offering
            price within that range.

      2.    PLEASE PROVIDE US WITH COPIES OF ANY ADDITIONAL ARTWORK YOU INTEND
            TO USE AS SOON AS POSSIBLE FOR OUR REVIEW AND COMMENT. PLEASE KEEP
            IN MIND THAT WE MAY HAVE COMMENTS ON THESE MATERIALS AND YOU SHOULD
            CONSIDER WAITING FOR THESE COMMENTS BEFORE PRINTING AND CIRCULATING
            ANY ARTWORK.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by including the
            additional artwork on the inside front and inside back cover of the
            prospectus.

      3.    PLEASE REVIEW YOUR DISCLOSURE AND ENSURE THAT YOU IDENTIFY THE
            SOURCE FOR THE STATEMENTS YOU PROVIDE. CURRENTLY, YOU INCLUDE MANY
            FACTUAL STATEMENTS, BUT YOU HAVE NOT INDICATED WHETHER THE SOURCE OF
            THIS INFORMATION IS BASED UPON MANAGEMENT'S BELIEF, INDUSTRY DATA,
            REPORTS/ARTICLES, OR ANY OTHER SOURCE. IF THE STATEMENTS ARE BASED
            UPON MANAGEMENT'S BELIEF, PLEASE INDICATE THAT THIS IS THE CASE AND
            INCLUDE AN EXPLANATION FOR THE BASIS OF THAT BELIEF. ALTERNATIVELY,
            IF THE INFORMATION IS BASED UPON REPORTS OR ARTICLES, PLEASE
            SUPPLEMENTALLY PROVIDE THESE DOCUMENTS TO US (APPROPRIATELY MARKED
            AND DATED). THE FOLLOWING ARE EXAMPLES ONLY OF THE STATEMENTS FOR
            WHICH YOU NEED SOURCES:

                  -     "WE PROVIDE THIS OFFERING AT COMPELLING VALUES WITH
                        NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED BRANDED MERCHANDISE OFFERED AT 20%
                        TO 60% DISCOUNTS TO DEPARTMENT AND SPECIALTY STORES'
                        REGULAR PRICES." BUSINESS, PAGE 33.

                  -     "ACCORDING TO A NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED FIRM THAT
                        SPECIALIZES IN APPAREL RESEARCH, RETAIL SALES OF
                        OFF-PRICE APPAREL TOTALED $16.5 BILLION IN THE U.S. IN
                        2004, UP MORE THAN 15% FROM 2003." BUSINESS, PAGE 33.

                  -     "THE OFF-PRICE APPAREL MARKET IS DOMINATED BY LARGE
                        FORMAT, NATIONAL APPAREL COMPANIES[.]" BUSINESS, PAGE
                        33.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 3


            WE MAY HAVE FURTHER COMMENTS ONCE WE EXAMINE YOUR REVISIONS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising its
            disclosure in several locations to identify the source of various
            factual statements. For example, please see the revised version of
            the second bullet above on page 33 of the prospectus in which the
            Company has identified NPD Fashionworld, a division of The NPD
            Group, or NPD, as the source of the statement. The Company has also
            indicated in several instances where a factual statement is based
            upon the Company's belief.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that a substantial
            majority of its merchandise contains a MSRP number on the price tag,
            and the Company believes such merchandise is offered at that price
            in department or specialty stores. The Company's customary pricing
            process is to leave the department or specialty store price on the
            price tag of the Company for the nationally recognized branded
            merchandise and to establish the Company's price for such
            merchandise at 20% to 60% discounts to such department or specialty
            store prices. The Company believes many manufacturers supply such
            merchandise with a suggested retail price on the price tags.

            Additionally, the Company supplementally informs the Staff that
            according to information provided by NPD, the Company estimates the
            size of the off-price apparel retail market in 2004 totaled $16.5
            billion. NPD includes within this market the large retail chains
            owned by Burlington Coat Factory Warehouse Corporation, Ross Stores,
            Inc., including Ross Dress For Less, and The TJX Companies, Inc.,
            such as Marshalls and T.J. Maxx. For the reported twelve-month
            periods closest to December 31, 2004, sales for these three retail
            companies, including sales from non-apparel items such as household
            goods and accessories, totaled approximately $22.1 billion.
            Specifically, The TJX Companies, Inc. reported net sales of $14.9
            billion for the fiscal year ended January 29, 2005, Ross Stores,
            Inc. reported net sales of $4.2 billion for the fiscal year ended
            January 29, 2005, and Burlington Coat Factory Warehouse Corporation
            reported net sales of $3.0 billion for the twelve-month period ended
            November 27, 2004. Although none of these retailers have
            specifically reported apparel net sales as a percentage of their
            total net sales during these periods, the Company's management
            believes that apparel sales represent a majority of total net sales
            for the three retailers, representing at least $11.1 billion or over
            two-thirds of the total off-price apparel retail market.

      4.    PLEASE NOTE THE UPDATING REQUIREMENTS OF RULE 3-12 OF REGULATION
            S-X.

            The Company confirms that it will comply with all updating
            requirements of Rule 3-12 of Regulation S-X. The Company has
            included in Amendment No. 1 audited financial statements for the
            fiscal year ended January 29, 2005 and has provided updated
            information throughout the prospectus relating to that financial
            data, including under Management's Discussion and Analysis of
            Financial Condition and Results of Operations.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 4


Table of Contents

      5.    THE FOREPART OF YOUR DOCUMENT SHOULD CONSIST OF THE COVER PAGE,
            SUMMARY AND RISK FACTORS. PLEASE MOVE THE PARAGRAPHS BENEATH THE
            TABLE OF CONTENTS TO A MORE APPROPRIATE LOCATION IN YOUR PROSPECTUS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure to delete the paragraphs beneath the table of contents
            within the prospectus. The first such paragraph appears on the back
            cover of the prospectus, and the information contained in the second
            such paragraph appears in the Business section under the heading
            "Intellectual Property" on page 41 of the prospectus.

Prospectus Summary, page 1

      6.    THE SUMMARY SECTION IS INTENDED TO PROVIDE A BRIEF OVERVIEW OF THE
            KEY ASPECTS OF YOUR OFFERING. CURRENTLY, YOUR SUMMARY IS TOO LONG
            AND REPEATS MUCH OF THE INFORMATION FULLY DISCUSSED IN YOUR BUSINESS
            SECTION. FOR EXAMPLE, YOU SHOULD REMOVE THE INDUSTRY SECTION FROM
            THE SUMMARY SINCE IT ALSO APPEARS IN THE BUSINESS SECTION. ALSO,
            PLEASE REMOVE OR SUBSTANTIALLY SHORTEN YOUR DISCUSSION OF YOUR
            DIFFERENTIATION STRATEGY, BUSINESS STRENGTHS AND GROWTH STRATEGY. AT
            A MINIMUM, THESE SECTIONS SHOULD NOT REPEAT OTHER DISCLOSURE IN THE
            SUMMARY. THE SUMMARY IS ONLY INTENDED TO PROVIDE A BRIEF SNAPSHOT OF
            THE OFFERING. SEE INSTRUCTION TO ITEM 503(A) OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            Summary section of the prospectus to provide a brief overview of the
            key aspects of the offering, including the increase in average sales
            per store over the last five years, and to delete the Industry
            section from the Summary.

Risk Factors, page 6

      7.    YOUR RISK FACTORS SECTION SHOULD BE A DISCUSSION OF THE MOST
            SIGNIFICANT FACTORS THAT MAKE YOU OFFERING SPECULATIVE OR RISKY. YOU
            SHOULD PLACE RISK FACTORS IN CONTEXT SO YOUR READERS CAN UNDERSTAND
            THE SPECIFIC RISK AS IT APPLIES TO YOU. SEE SEC RELEASE NO. 33-7497.
            ALSO, YOU SHOULD NOT PRESENT RISKS THAT ARE GENERIC OR CONTAIN
            BOILERPLATE LANGUAGE THAT COULD APPLY TO ANY ISSUER OR ANY OFFERING.
            WE BELIEVE A DISCUSSION OF RISK IN GENERIC TERMS DOES NOT TELL YOUR
            READERS HOW THE RISK MAY AFFECT THEIR INVESTMENT IN YOU. PLEASE
            REVISE YOUR RISK FACTORS SECTION GENERALLY TO WRITE EACH RISK FACTOR
            IN PLAIN ENGLISH AND AVOID USING BOILERPLATE OR GENERIC RISK
            FACTORS. SEE ITEM 503(C) OF REGULATION S-K. AS EXAMPLES, PLEASE
            CONSIDER THE FOLLOWING RISK FACTORS:

                  -     "EXPANSION INTO NEW MARKETS MAY PRESENT RISKS DIFFERENT
                        FROM OUR EXISTING MARKETS, AND WE MAY HAVE DIFFICULTY
                        OVERCOMING THEM."

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 5


                  -     "OUR BUSINESS AND GROWTH STRATEGIES DEPEND ON OUR
                        ABILITY TO OBTAIN A SUFFICIENT AMOUNT OF MERCHANDISE,
                        AND OUR FAILURE TO MEET CURRENT AND INCREASED
                        MERCHANDISING NEEDS COULD HAVE A MATERIAL ADVERSE EFFECT
                        ON OUR BUSINESS, FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF
                        OPERATIONS."

                  -     "CHANGES IN THE REGULATORY ENVIRONMENT GOVERNING OUR
                        BUSINESS COULD HAVE A MATERIAL ADVERSE EFFECT ON OUR
                        BUSINESS, FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS.

            FURTHER, SOME OF YOUR RISK FACTOR DISCUSSIONS DO NOT CLEARLY AND
            CONCISELY CONVEY THE ACTUAL RISK, SUCH AS THE SECOND RISK FACTOR ON
            PAGE 8 AND THE LAST RISK FACTOR ON PAGE 10. CONSIDER WHETHER OTHER
            SUBSECTIONS OR ELEMENTS OF A DISCUSSION WITHIN A SUBSECTION ARE
            NECESSARY FOR THIS SECTION, AND WHETHER CERTAIN RISK FACTORS CAN BE
            COMBINED SO THEY ARE NOT REPETITIVE. ACCORDINGLY, PLEASE THOROUGHLY
            REVISE THIS SECTION TO MORE PRECISELY ARTICULATE THE RISKS TO YOUR
            OFFERING FROM EACH RISK FACTOR, AND TO ENSURE THAT EACH FACTOR IS
            WRITTEN IN PLAIN ENGLISH. WE MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL COMMENTS BASED UPON
            YOUR REVISIONS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            Risk Factors section (i) to indicate the risks that relate
            specifically to the Company and (ii) to remove boilerplate or
            generic risk factors. The Company has also revised the Risk Factors
            section to indicate the risks by related categories. Additionally,
            the Company has revised the Risk Factors section so that each risk
            factor is presented fully in plain English. Please see the revised
            Risk Factors section on pages 6 to 15 of the prospectus.

Our business and growth strategies depend on our ability to obtain a sufficient
amount..., page 7

      8.    PLEASE CONSIDER BREAKING UP THIS RISK FACTOR TO INCLUDE AN
            ADDITIONAL RISK FACTOR DISCUSSING YOUR RISKS IN RECEIVING PRODUCTS
            THAT YOU ARE PROHIBITED FROM SELLING OR THAT ARE COUNTERFEIT BRANDS
            OR UNLICENSED GOODS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            risk factor to discuss the Company's risk in receiving products it
            is prohibited from selling or that comprise counterfeit brands or
            unlicensed goods. Please see page 7 of the prospectus.

We rely on only two distribution centers, one of which also serves as..., page 7

      9.    PLEASE QUANTIFY, TO THE EXTENT POSSIBLE, HOW MUCH OF YOUR TOTAL
            OPERATIONS DEPEND ON EACH DISTRIBUTION CENTER.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company
            currently operates two distribution centers, the Fahm facility,
            which the Company owns,

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 6


            and the Coleman facility, which the Company leases. Both
            distribution centers perform critical processes of the Company's
            total distribution function. The Coleman building handles all of the
            Company's receiving functions, while the Fahm building handles all
            of the Company's shipping functions. Therefore, all of the Company's
            operations depend on both facilities.

We depend on the experience and expertise of our senior management team..., page
9

      10.   PLEASE IDENTIFY ALL THE KEY PERSONNEL UPON WHOM YOU DEPEND.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            risk factor on page 11 of the prospectus to reflect that R. Edward
            Anderson and George A. Bellino are the only key personnel upon whom
            the Company depends.

Our failure to protect our trademarks could have a negative effect..., page 9

      11.   PLEASE STATE WHICH OTHER ENTITIES HAVE TRADEMARKS THAT CONTAIN THE
            WORD "CITI" OR SIMILAR MARKS FOR APPAREL AND CLOTHING. ALSO, PLEASE
            DISCLOSE THE LIKELIHOOD THAT OTHERS WILL TRY TO PREVENT YOUR
            MANUFACTURING OR SALE OF YOUR PRIVATE LABEL MERCHANDISE BY CLAIMING
            THAT YOUR MERCHANDISE VIOLATES THEIR TRADEMARKS OR OTHER PROPRIETARY
            RIGHTS. FURTHER, PLEASE DISCUSS THE LIKELIHOOD OF THE OTHER
            ENTITIES' SUCCESS. IF YOU DO NOT KNOW WHICH ENTITIES HAVE THESE
            RIGHTS, OR THE LIKELIHOOD OF A SUCCESSFUL LAWSUIT IS SMALL, PLEASE
            CONSIDER DELETING THIS PORTION OF THE RISK FACTOR.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure in the risk factor on page 10 of the prospectus.
            Based on informal trademark searches conducted by the Company,
            other entities, including Apparel Resources, Inc., Citicraze
            Casualware, Inc., T. Juniors Inc. and Citicorp Corp., have live
            federal trademark registrations that include the word "Citi" for
            use in connection with clothing generally or women's clothing
            specifically.  Other entities also have cancelled registrations
            and abandoned applications for marks that include the word "Citi".

Adverse trade restrictions may disrupt our supply of merchandise..., page 12

      12.   PLEASE SPECIFY THE FOREIGN COUNTRIES IN WHICH YOUR MERCHANDISE IS
            CURRENTLY MANUFACTURED, AND PLEASE DISCLOSE ANY SPECIFIC POLITICAL
            RISKS THAT WOULD EFFECT YOUR BUSINESS OPERATIONS IN THESE COUNTRIES.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 10 of the prospectus to indicate that the
            Company currently receives merchandise from China, Taiwan, the
            Philippines and other areas of the Far East. The Company
            respectfully submits that it is difficult to assess and predict the
            specific political risks that may arise in the future within these
            foreign countries and negatively impact the Company's business
            operations.

Use of Proceeds, page 17

      13.   YOU STATE THAT WITH YOUR PROCEEDS YOU INTEND TO REPAY YOUR
            OUTSTANDING INDEBTEDNESS TO NATIONAL BANK OF COMMERCE, BANK OF
            AMERICA, AND CONGRESS FINANCIAL. PLEASE DISCLOSE THE AMOUNTS YOU
            CURRENTLY OWE TO EACH OF

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 7


            THESE BANKS AND WHETHER YOU WILL REPAY THE DEBTS IN FULL. ALSO,
            PLEASE TELL US IF THESE DEBTS WERE INCURRED WITHIN THE LAST YEAR. IF
            SO, PLEASE DESCRIBE THE USE OF THE PROCEEDS OF THIS INDEBTEDNESS
            OTHER THAN SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS USED FOR WORKING CAPITAL. SEE
            INSTRUCTION 4 TO ITEM 504 OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            Use of Proceeds disclosure on page 17 of the prospectus to state
            that the Company will repay all outstanding indebtedness to National
            Bank of Commerce, Bank of America and Congress Financial. Also, the
            Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the Use of
            Proceeds disclosure to state the approximate dollar amounts owed to
            National Bank of Commerce; however, the amounts owed by the Company
            to each of Bank of America and Congress Financial is unknown at this
            time due to the revolving nature of the facilities.

            The Company supplementally advises the Staff that the indebtedness
            under its $3.0 million line of credit with Bank of America and its
            $25.0 million line of credit with Congress Financial that is being
            repaid with a portion of the net proceeds from this offering
            consists of short-term indebtedness incurred for the purchase of
            inventory and other working capital purposes.

      14.   YOU STATE THAT IF YOU HAVE ANY REMAINING NET PROCEEDS YOU WILL USE
            THE PROCEEDS FOR NEW STORE OPENINGS, INCLUDING THE ACQUISITION OR
            DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION OF A NEW DISTRIBUTION CENTER IN FISCAL 2006.
            SINCE THIS IS AN UNDERWRITTEN OFFERING, IT CAN REASONABLY BE
            EXPECTED THAT THE ACTUAL PROCEEDS WILL NOT BE SUBSTANTIALLY LESS
            THAN YOUR AGGREGATE PROCEEDS. THEREFORE, PLEASE TELL US WHY YOU HAVE
            NOT DETERMINED APPROXIMATELY HOW MUCH OF THE REMAINING PROCEEDS YOU
            WILL SPEND ON NEW STORE OPENINGS OR A NEW DISTRIBUTION CENTER.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the extent to
            which the Company will finance the opening of its new stores with
            internally generated cash flows depends, in part, on its results of
            operations and therefore it is not possible to establish the precise
            level of net proceeds from this offering that will be used by the
            Company for new store openings. In addition, the timing of the
            Company's design and construction, lease or purchase of a new
            distribution center is indeterminable at this time. The Company has
            hired a third party to conduct a site and feasibility study
            regarding the necessary size and location of the new distribution
            facility.

      15.   ALSO, SINCE THESE PROCEEDS WILL BE USED TO ACQUIRE ASSETS, OTHERWISE
            THAN IN THE ORDINARY COURSE OF BUSINESS, PLEASE DESCRIBE BRIEFLY AND
            STATE THE COST OF THESE ASSETS. FURTHER, IF ANY OF THESE ASSETS ARE
            TO BE ACQUIRED FROM YOUR AFFILIATES OR THEIR ASSOCIATES, PLEASE GIVE
            THE NAMES OF THE PERSONS FROM WHOM THEY ARE TO BE ACQUIRED AND SET
            FORTH THE PRINCIPLE FOLLOWED IN DETERMINING THEIR COST. SEE
            INSTRUCTION 5 TO ITEM 504 OF REGULATION S-K.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 8


            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the costs related
            to the potential design and construction or purchase of a new
            distribution center are costs that are incurred in the ordinary
            course of business of a growth retailer's life cycle. Other than the
            potential acquisition of the distribution center as discussed above
            and as specifically disclosed in the prospectus, the Company does
            not plan to acquire assets other than in the ordinary course of
            business. The Company additionally informs the Staff that the
            Company has no current agreement, arrangement, understanding or
            intention to acquire any assets through or from any affiliates of
            the Company or any of their associates.

Selected Financial and Operating Data, page 20

      16.   PLEASE INCLUDE THE AMOUNTS FOR THE "NET INCOME PER COMMON SHARE" AND
            "WEIGHTED AVERAGE SHARE."

            For the reasons indicated in the Company's response to Staff comment
            #1, the Company has not revised the disclosure within the prospectus
            to include the per share data in Amendment No. 1, but will comply
            with the Staff's comment and revise the disclosure in a subsequent
            amendment to include the amounts for the net income per common share
            and weighted average share.

      17.   PLEASE EXPAND THE BALANCE SHEET DATA ON PAGE 21 TO SHOW THE
            MANDATORY REDEEMABLE PREFERRED STOCK AS A LIABILITY FOR THE YEARS
            PRIOR TO THE RECLASSIFICATION.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure within the balance sheet data on page 21 of the
            prospectus to show mandatory redeemable preferred stock as a
            liability for all periods presented.

Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results...,
page 22

      18.   WE NOTE FROM THE DISCLOSURE ON PAGE 12 THAT YOU ARE INSTITUTING
            CHANGES TO ADDRESS AND IMPROVE YOUR INTERNAL CONTROL PROCEDURES AND
            COMPLIANCE CAPABILITIES. IN THIS SECTION, PLEASE DISCUSS THE
            IMPROVEMENTS THAT YOU MUST MAKE TO YOUR INTERNAL AND DISCLOSURE
            CONTROLS TO THE EXTENT THAT YOU BELIEVE YOU WILL HAVE DIFFICULTY
            IMPLEMENTING THESE CHANGES AND THAT THESE AREAS WILL REMAIN A RISK
            TO YOUR FINANCIAL REPORTING OBLIGATIONS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by adding
            disclosure on page 23 of the prospectus relating to the Company's
            internal control procedures and compliance capabilities. The Company
            supplementally informs the Staff that it has hired RSM McGladrey, a
            professional consulting firm, to assist the Company in the
            compliance process. The Company has revised the disclosure on page
            23 of the prospectus to indicate that the Company anticipates
            retaining additional personnel to assist the Company in satisfying
            its Section 404 compliance obligations, and is currently evaluating
            whether such personnel will be retained as consultants or employees
            of the Company. The Company has experienced difficulty in hiring
            individuals with experience in financial reporting and compliance
            with the accounting rules and regulations of the Commission. The
            Company believes that consultants can fill any short fall related
            to such employees. Although the Company is instituting changes to
            address and improve internal control procedures and

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 9


            compliance capabilities, the Company is not aware of any difficulty
            in implementing these changes and believes that the implementation
            process presents no material risks to the Company's financial
            reporting obligations.

      19.   PLEASE EXPAND THIS SECTION TO DISCUSS KNOWN MATERIAL TRENDS AND
            UNCERTAINTIES THAT WILL HAVE, OR ARE REASONABLY LIKELY TO HAVE, A
            MATERIAL IMPACT ON YOUR REVENUES OR INCOME OR RESULT IN YOUR
            LIQUIDITY DECREASING OR INCREASING IN ANY MATERIAL WAY. PLEASE
            PROVIDE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ABOUT THE QUALITY AND VARIABILITY OF
            YOUR EARNINGS AND CASH FLOWS SO THAT INVESTORS CAN ASCERTAIN THE
            LIKELIHOOD OF THE EXTENT PAST PERFORMANCE IS INDICATIVE OF FUTURE
            PERFORMANCE. WE NOTE, FOR EXAMPLE, THAT YOUR COMPARABLE STORES SALES
            HAVE DECLINED SIGNIFICANTLY FOR THE 39 WEEKS ENDED OCTOBER 30, 2004
            TO LEVELS BELOW THOSE FOLLOWING YOUR REMODELING INITIATIVES. PLEASE
            DISCUSS WHETHER YOU EXPECT LEVELS TO REMAIN AT THIS LEVEL OR TO
            INCREASE OR DECREASE. ALSO, YOU SHOULD CONSIDER DISCUSSING THE
            IMPACT OF ANY CHANGES ON YOUR EARNINGS. FURTHER, PLEASE DISCUSS IN
            REASONABLE DETAIL:

                  -     ECONOMIC OR INDUSTRY-WIDE FACTORS RELEVANT TO YOUR
                        COMPANY, AND

                  -     MATERIAL OPPORTUNITIES, CHALLENGES, AND RISKS IN SHORT
                        AND LONG TERM AND THE ACTIONS YOU ARE TAKING TO ADDRESS
                        THEM.

            SEE ITEM 303 OF REGULATION S-K AND SEC RELEASE NO. 33-8350.

            The Company has evaluated the known material trends and
            uncertainties that have, or are reasonably likely to have, a
            material impact on the Company's revenues or income or result in the
            Company's liquidity decreasing or increasing in any material way and
            respectfully submits that it believes that it has addressed the
            Staff's comment in its disclosure. The Company also submits that the
            trends in comparable stores sales growth are discussed throughout
            Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and
            Results of Operations with specific emphasis in the fifth and sixth
            paragraphs of the "Overview" of that section.

      20.   WE NOTE THAT MANAGEMENT USES OPERATING STATISTICS, SUCH AS CUSTOMER
            COUNTS, ITEMS PURCHASED PER CUSTOMER, AND AVERAGE ITEM PRICE. PLEASE
            CONSIDER PROVIDING THESE METRICS AND ANY OTHER STATISTICS, SUCH AS
            SALES PER SQUARE FOOT AND AVERAGE AMOUNT OF CUSTOMER PURCHASES, TO
            ENABLE INVESTORS TO VIEW YOUR OPERATIONS THROUGH MANAGEMENT'S EYES.

            With respect to the operating statistics referred to in the Staff's
            comment, the Company respectfully submits that disclosing such
            statistics would place the Company at a competitive disadvantage.
            In addition, the Company disfavors the disclosure of such operating
            statistics within the prospectus, as the data underlying such
            statictics is subjective and imprecise. Although operating
            statistics such as customer counts, items per customer and average
            item price are useful to management in analyzing operating
            performance, without knowledge of and experience in the retail
            apparel industry such operating

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 10


            statistics could be potentially confusing and misleading to
            investors given the subjectivity of the analysis of such data. In
            addition, management believes that publicly disclosing such
            operating statistics would place the Company at a competitive
            disadvantage to other companies in the discount retail business as
            other companies do not make such disclosures. However, in response
            to the Staff's comment, the Company has revised its disclosure on
            pages 22 and 23 to include information related to average sales per
            store.

      21.   IF YOU CHOOSE TO PRESENT THE NON-GAAP MEASURE OF "AVERAGE STORE
            LEVEL CASH FLOW" SHOWN ON PAGE 22, PLEASE REVISE TO INCLUDE ALSO THE
            DISCLOSURES REQUIRED BY ITEM 10(E) OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by replacing the
            disclosure on pages 22 and 36 of the prospectus pertaining to
            "average store level cash flow" with disclosures relating to "store
            operating profit", including the manner in which store operating
            profit is calculated.

Overview, page 22

      22.   PLEASE DISCLOSE THE STATUS OF ANY ACTIONS YOU HAVE COMPLETED IN
            FURTHERANCE OF ACQUIRING OR DESIGNING AND CONSTRUCTING A NEW
            DISTRIBUTION CENTER IN SOUTHEASTERN GEORGIA IN FISCAL YEAR 2006.
            ALSO, PLEASE STATE THE LIKELIHOOD THAT A NEW DISTRIBUTION CENTER
            WILL BE OPERATIONAL BY THAT TIME.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company is in
            the needs assessment and site location process relative to its new
            distribution center. As noted in the Company's response to Staff
            comment #14 above, the Company believes it will need additional
            distribution capacity for the spring of 2007 and therefore intends
            to have a new facility operational by the end of 2006. The Company
            has hired a third party to conduct a site and feasibility study
            regarding the necessary size and location of the new distribution
            facility. The Company expects to receive the results of the study in
            the near future, and the Company expects that after receipt of the
            report, the Company will determine whether to design and construct,
            purchase or lease a new distribution center and will select a
            suitable location.

      23.   PLEASE FURTHER EXPLAIN THE IMPACT THAT THE WTO AGREEMENT ON TEXTILES
            AND CLOTHING WILL HAVE ON YOUR OPERATIONS. WE NOTE THAT EVEN THOUGH
            THE AVERAGE DOLLAR AMOUNT OF SALES PER CUSTOMER SPENT IN YOUR STORES
            WOULD BE REDUCED, APPARENTLY, SO WOULD YOUR COST IN PURCHASING YOUR
            STOCK GOODS. ALSO, WHAT "VARIOUS ACTIONS" HAVE BEEN TAKEN OR
            THREATENED BY PARTIES AFFECTED BY THE REMOVAL OF THE QUOTAS, AND WHO
            ARE THE PARTIES TO WHOM YOU ARE REFERRING?

            The Company respectfully submits that, while the Company's goods
            could become less expensive, competition will likely require most
            apparel retailers to decrease proportionately the prices they charge
            customers for such goods. As a result of the removal of the quotas,
            the Company may have to sell significantly

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 11


            more merchandise in order to achieve the same amount of total sales
            as in prior periods, which could significantly impact the Company's
            profit margins.

            At the end of 2004, the U.S. textile and apparel industry petitioned
            the U.S. government to impose "safeguards" (special quantitative
            restrictions) on twelve categories of textile and apparel based upon
            the "threat" being posed by the removal of quotas on January 1,
            2005. The U.S. government did impose the safeguard measures, but an
            injunction was imposed by the U.S. Court of International Trade
            because the actions had been based only on "threat" data. It is
            expected that the injunction will be reconsidered by the court in
            late April or mid-May. On April 4, 2005, the U.S. Department of
            Commerce initiated safeguard proceedings with respect to three
            products (cotton knit shirts and blouses, cotton trousers and cotton
            and man-made fiber underwear) to evaluate the effect of removal of
            the quotas and the necessity of any remedial action.

Results of Operations, page 24

      24.   PLEASE DISCUSS ANY OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS THAT HAVE, OR ARE
            REASONABLY LIKELY TO HAVE, A CURRENT OR FUTURE EFFECT ON YOUR
            FINANCIAL CONDITION, REVENUES OR EXPENSES, RESULTS OF OPERATIONS,
            LIQUIDITY OR CAPITAL RESOURCES. SEE ITEM 303(A)(4) OF REGULATION
            S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 30 of the prospectus to state that, other than
            the Company's store operating leases, which are described in the
            prospectus, the Company does not have any off-balance sheet
            arrangements that have, or are reasonably likely to have, a current
            or future effect on its financial condition, revenue, expenses,
            results of operations, liquidity or capital resources.

Quarterly Results of Operations, page 26

      25.   PLEASE ADD PER SHARE DATA TO YOUR QUARTERLY RESULTS OF OPERATIONS AS
            REQUIRED BY ITEM 302(A)(L) OF REGULATION S-K.

            For the reasons indicated in the Company's response to Staff comment
            #1, the Company has not revised the disclosure to include the per
            share data in Amendment No. 1, but will comply with the Staff's
            comment and revise the disclosure in a subsequent amendment to add
            the per share data to the Company's quarterly results of operations.

Liquidity Sources,  Requirements and Contractual Cash Requirements..., page 28

      26.   IN THIS SECTION, YOU STATE THAT "[S]OME OPERATING LEASES PROVIDE FOR
            FIXED MONTHLY RENTALS WHILE OTHERS PROVIDE FOR RENTALS COMPUTED AS A
            PERCENTAGE OF NET SALES." ON PAGE 40, YOU SAY THAT YOUR "TYPICAL
            STORE LEASE" REQUIRES YOU TO PAY "PERCENTAGE RENT." PLEASE REVISE
            ONE OR BOTH OF THESE STATEMENTS SO THAT YOUR DOCUMENT REFLECTS
            CONSISTENTLY HOW YOUR LEASES ARE STRUCTURED. TO THE EXTENT
            PRACTICABLE, QUANTIFY THE NUMBER OF LEASES WITH FIXED MONTHLY

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 12


            RENTALS COMPARED TO THOSE FOR WHICH RENTALS ARE COMPUTED AS A
            PERCENTAGE OF SALES.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            statements on pages 29 and 30 of the prospectus to ensure the
            disclosures within the prospectus reflect consistently the manner in
            which the Company's leases are structured. In addition, on page 41
            of the prospectus the Company has added disclosure regarding the one
            store with a fixed monthly rental as compared to the rest of the
            Company's stores for which rentals are computed as a percentage of
            sales.

      27.   PLEASE INCLUDE CONTINGENT LEASE PAYMENTS IN THE CONTRACTUAL
            OBLIGATIONS SCHEDULE, IF ESTIMABLE, ALONG WITH DISCLOSURE OF THE
            ASSUMPTIONS USED TO CALCULATE THE ESTIMATE.

            The Company has not revised the disclosure to reflect the Staff's
            comment, as the amount of contingent lease payments for future years
            is not estimable, in part due to the inability to accurately
            estimate sales on a per store basis. The Company has added
            disclosure within footnote 3 on page 29 of the prospectus to
            reflect the amount recognized by the Company in fiscal 2004.

      28.   IN FOOTNOTE 5, PLEASE EXPAND YOUR DISCLOSURE TO INDICATE IF THE
            TERMINATION FEE TO BE PAID UPON CONSUMMATION OF THE OFFERING HAS
            BEEN PAID OR WILL BE PAID FROM THE PROCEEDS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure in what is now footnote 4 on page 29 of the prospectus to
            state that the termination fee will be paid no later than December
            31, 2005, will be recognized as an expense upon consummation of the
            offering and will not be paid from the proceeds of the offering.

Critical Accounting Policies, page 30

      29.   PLEASE REVISE YOUR DISCLOSURE TO PRESENT A MORE ROBUST DISCUSSION AS
            TO WHY THESE ARE CRITICAL ACCOUNTING POLICIES. THIS DISCLOSURE
            SHOULD SUPPLEMENT, NOT DUPLICATE, THE DESCRIPTION OF ACCOUNTING
            POLICIES THAT ARE ALREADY DISCLOSED IN THE NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL
            STATEMENTS. THE DISCLOSURE SHOULD PROVIDE GREATER INSIGHT INTO THE
            QUALITY AND VARIABILITY OF INFORMATION REGARDING FINANCIAL CONDITION
            AND OPERATING PERFORMANCE. THE DISCUSSION IN YOUR MANAGEMENT'S
            DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS SHOULD PRESENT YOUR ANALYSIS OF THE
            UNCERTAINTIES INVOLVED IN APPLYING A PRINCIPLE AT A GIVEN TIME OR
            THE VARIABILITY THAT IS REASONABLY LIKELY TO RESULT FROM ITS
            APPLICATION OVER TIME. ADDITIONALLY, PLEASE UNDERTAKE THE FOLLOWING:

                  -     DISCUSS WHY MANAGEMENT BELIEVES THE ACCOUNTING POLICY IS
                        CRITICAL;

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 13


                  -     DISCUSS HOW ACCURATE YOUR ESTIMATES AND ASSUMPTIONS HAVE
                        BEEN IN THE PAST, HOW MUCH THEY HAVE CHANGED IN THE
                        PAST, AND WHETHER THEY ARE LIKELY TO CHANGE IN THE
                        FUTURE; AND

                  -     INCLUDE QUANTITATIVE DISCLOSURE OF YOUR SENSITIVITY TO
                        CHANGE BASED ON OTHER OUTCOMES THAT ARE REASONABLY
                        LIKELY TO OCCUR AND THAT WOULD HAVE A MATERIAL EFFECT ON
                        THE COMPANY.

            FOR EXAMPLE, FOR YOUR REVENUE RECOGNITION POLICY YOU COULD DISCUSS
            THE PROVISION FOR SALES RETURNS AND ALLOWANCE FOR DOUBTFUL ACCOUNTS
            BOTH ON A TOTAL COST BASIS AS WELL AS ON A PERCENTAGE OF REVENUES.
            YOUR DISCUSSION COULD FURTHER ADDRESS VARIANCES THAT HAVE OCCURRED
            IN HISTORIC RESULTS, TRENDS, AND FUTURE EXPECTATIONS, AS WELL AS THE
            IMPACT TO THE STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS RESULTING FROM HYPOTHETICAL
            CHANGES. SEE ITEM V OF RELEASE NOS. 33-8350/34-48960.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure within Critical Accounting Policies on pages 30 and 31 of
            the prospectus to include only those accounting policies that
            require substantive management judgment and that have the potential
            to materially affect the Company's financial results.

            With respect to the third bullet point of the Staff's comment, the
            Company respectfully submits that it would not be practicable to
            present quantitative information with respect to the Company's
            critical accounting policies and that such information would not be
            useful to investors given the nature of such policies.

Business, page 33

      30.   SINCE THE STRENGTH OF YOUR BUSINESS OPERATIONS IS IN OFFERING YOUR
            MERCHANDISE AT DISCOUNTS TO YOUR CUSTOMERS, PLEASE DETAIL YOUR PLANS
            IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO "OPPORTUNISTICALLY" PURCHASE MERCHANDISE AT
            REDUCED PRICES AND THROUGH CLOSE-OUTS.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company has no
            alternative plans to being an off-price opportunistic and/or
            close-out buyer. The Company anticipates being able
            opportunistically to purchase merchandise at reduced prices and
            through close-outs. Other large retailers, such as TJ Maxx, have
            operated for many years as off-price, close-out retailers.

      31.   YOU STATE THAT YOU DO NOT SPEND LARGE SUMS ON FIXTURING, LEASEHOLD
            IMPROVEMENTS, EQUIPMENT, OR OTHER START UP COSTS, YET ON PAGE 22,
            YOU STATE THAT YOUR AVERAGE INVESTMENT FOR THE 40 STORES OPENED IN
            FISCAL 2004 WAS APPROXIMATELY $280,000. PLEASE PROVIDE SUPPORT THAT
            THIS IS NOT A COMPARATIVELY "LARGE SUM" IN YOUR INDUSTRY.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 22 of the prospectus to delete the statement that
            the amount was not a comparatively "large sum" in the retail
            industry.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 14


Growth Strategy, page 35

      32.   PLEASE EXPLAIN WHAT YOU MEAN BY "MERCHANDISING ENHANCEMENTS" AND THE
            "EXPANSION OF ADJACENT PRODUCT CATEGORIES." ALSO, PLEASE IDENTIFY
            THE GEOGRAPHIC AREAS IN WHICH YOU EXPECT TO EXPAND.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on pages 22 and 35 of the prospectus to expand on the use
            of both of the terms. The Company supplementally informs the Staff
            that the Company uses the term "merchandising enhancements" to
            describe its strategy to increase the assortment and amount of
            inventory in certain existing categories for which recent sales
            and/or sales trends are encouraging. The Company intends to continue
            to expand its relationships with important vendors and brokers. The
            phrase "expansion of adjacent product categories" refers to the
            Company's intention further to expand certain new product areas,
            such as the Company's home decor, gifts and accessories and intimate
            apparel product categories, as specifically disclosed on pages 2, 22
            and 35 of the prospectus. Based upon an analysis of the Company's
            target customer, the Company has identified potential store
            locations and expansion into each of Delaware, Illinois, Indiana,
            Kentucky, Michigan, Missouri, New Jersey, Ohio, Pennsylvania and
            Wisconsin by calendar 2008.

Store Operations, page 35

      33.   PLEASE DISCUSS HOW YOUR LAYAWAY PROGRAM COMPARES TO INDUSTRY
            PRACTICE. SEE ITEM L01(C)(1)(VI) OF REGULATION S-K. ALSO, PLEASE
            DISCLOSE THE AMOUNT OF THE RE-STOCKING FEE.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company's
            management believes competitors in the industry have instituted
            similar layaway programs. The Company directs the Staff to the
            Annual Report on Form 10-K filed on April 22, 2004 by one of its
            direct competitors, The Cato Corporation (the parent company of It's
            Fashions), which discusses a similar layaway program. The Company
            has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the disclosure to
            include the amount of the re-stocking fee.

Product Merchandising and Pricing, page 37

      34.   PLEASE IDENTIFY THE MANUFACTURERS OF THE PRODUCTS THAT ARE TYPICALLY
            REPRESENTED BY NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED BRANDS TO THE EXTENT THAT THESE
            BRANDS INDIVIDUALLY REPRESENT A MATERIAL PORTION OF YOUR SALES.

            The Company supplementally provides the following list of
            manufacturers that typically provide nationally recognized brands:
            Baby Phat, Dickies, FuBu, Phat Farm, Rocawear, South Pole and US
            Polo Association. Although these brands collectively represent a
            material portion of the Company's sales, no single brand represents
            a material portion of the Company's sales. The Company has
            determined not to include the list of manufacturers in the
            prospectus for several reasons, including the fact that no single
            brand represents a material portion of the

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 15


            Company's sales, the requirement to obtain the manufacturers'
            consent to include them within such a list and the fact that the
            common practice in the retail industry is not to identify the
            manufacturers.

Sourcing and Allocation, page 38

      35.   PLEASE DISCLOSE THE NAMES OF YOUR TWO INDEPENDENT FASHION CONSULTING
            FIRMS. ALSO, IF YOU HAVE ANY MATERIAL AGREEMENTS WITH THESE FIRMS,
            PLEASE FILE THEM AS MATERIAL CONTRACTS. SEE ITEM 601(B)(10) OF
            REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 38 of the prospectus to identify the two
            independent fashion consulting firms. The Company supplementally
            informs the Staff that the Company does not have any agreements with
            these fashion consulting firms.

      36.   PLEASE DISCLOSE WHY YOU BELIEVE ALTERNATE SOURCES OF MERCHANDISE FOR
            ALL PRODUCT CATEGORIES ARE AVAILABLE AT COMPARABLE PRICES SHOULD YOU
            CHANGE YOUR SUPPLIERS; ESPECIALLY IF YOUR SALES ARE DEPENDENT ON
            "NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED BRANDS." FURTHER, PLEASE DISCUSS ANY OTHER
            FACTORS THAT MAY DISRUPT THE AVAILABILITY OF YOUR PRODUCTS, AND YOUR
            ALTERNATIVES SHOULD A DISRUPTION OCCUR. SEE ITEM 101(C)(1)(III) OF
            REGULATION S-K.

            As disclosed on page 37 in the prospectus, approximately 30% of the
            merchandise that the Company sells is from nationally recognized
            brands. The Company purchases this nationally recognized brand
            merchandise from approximately 30 to 50 vendors. The Company
            believes that alternate sources of merchandise for all product
            categories are available at comparable prices, as thousands of
            vendors are available to supply the Company with merchandise. In
            addition, the Company strives to maintain strong relationships with
            its vendors in order to obtain quality merchandise in acceptable
            price ranges.

Distribution, page 39

      37.   IN THIS SECTION, YOU DESCRIBE YOUR PRACTICES REGARDING HOW YOU
            HANDLE WORKING CAPITAL ITEMS. IN ADDITION, PLEASE DISCUSS INDUSTRY
            PRACTICES IN HANDLING WORKING CAPITAL ITEMS. FOR EXAMPLE, PLEASE
            DISCLOSE HOW YOU COMPARE WITH OTHERS IN YOUR INDUSTRY IN CARRYING
            THE PROPER AMOUNT OF INVENTORY TO MEET YOUR DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS
            AND ASSURE YOURSELF OF A CONTINUOUS ALLOTMENT OF GOODS FROM
            SUPPLIERS. ALSO, PLEASE DISCUSS YOUR CUSTOMERS' RIGHTS TO RETURN
            PURCHASED MERCHANDISE, IF ANY, AND HOW YOUR POLICIES COMPARE WITH
            INDUSTRY PRACTICE. SEE ITEM 101(C)(1)(VI) OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company
            handles working capital items by establishing and maintaining target
            inventory turn ratios to measure management's performance. The
            Company's buyers continuously search for merchandise in the apparel
            markets on behalf of the Company. The Company supplementally informs
            the Staff that the Company does not compare

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 16


            its targets with other retailers, as most retailers have unique ways
            of calculating inventory performance through inventory turns, weeks
            of supply or other measures. Overall, the Company's existing and new
            store sales growth suggests that its has not had significant
            difficulties in carrying appropriate inventory levels. Additionally,
            the Company's gross margins have remained consistent from 2000 to
            2004, indicating that the Company does not carry an excess of
            inventory.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by including
            disclosure about our return policies on page 38 of the prospectus.

Information Technology and Systems, page 39

      38.   WE NOTE THAT YOU ANTICIPATE SELLING SELECTED BRANDED APPAREL
            PROVIDED BY THIRD PARTIES ON YOUR WEBSITE. PLEASE CONSIDER
            DISCUSSING IN MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS YOUR EXPECTATIONS
            REGARDING THE EFFECT OF THESE SALES ON YOUR RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
            FOR FUTURE PERIODS TO THE EXTENT THAT YOU BELIEVE THESE SALES WILL
            HAVE A MATERIAL EFFECT ON YOUR OPERATIONS.

            The Company has not revised its disclosure within the prospectus in
            response to the Staff's comment because the selling of selected
            branded apparel on the Company's website is expected to be
            immaterial in the near term.

Competition, page 40

      39.   PLEASE ESTIMATE YOUR COMPETITIVE POSITION RELATIVE TO THE
            COMPETITORS YOU MENTION. ALSO, PLEASE DISCUSS THE PRINCIPAL METHODS
            OF COMPETITION AND THE POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE FACTORS PERTAINING TO
            YOUR COMPETITIVE POSITION. SEE ITEM 101(C)(1)(X) OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure in the Business section under the heading "Competition"
            on page 40 of the prospectus.

Legal Proceedings, page 41

      40.   FOR THE TWO PROCEEDINGS THAT YOU MENTION, PLEASE INCLUDE THE NAME OF
            THE COURT, THE PRINCIPAL PARTIES, A DESCRIPTION OF THE FACTUAL BASIS
            ALLEGED TO UNDERLIE THE PROCEEDINGS, AND THE RELIEF SOUGHT BY THE
            PLAINTIFFS. SEE ITEM 103 OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 41 of the prospectus to include the name of the
            court, the principal parties, a description of the factual basis
            alleged to underlie the proceedings and the relief sought by the
            plaintiffs.

Executive Officers and Directors, page 42

      41.   ON PAGE 52, YOU STATE THAT MR. BELLINO WAS YOUR CHIEF EXECUTIVE
            OFFICER AND PRESIDENT FROM APRIL 1999 TO DECEMBER 2001. HOWEVER, IN
            THIS SECTION, YOU STATE THAT MR. BELLINO HAS BEEN YOUR PRESIDENT AND
            CHIEF MERCHANDISING OFFICER SINCE JANUARY 1997. PLEASE REVISE OR
            ADVISE.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 17


            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 42 of the prospectus to reflect that Mr. Bellino
            served as the Company's Chief Executive Officer and President from
            April 1999 to December 2001.

      42.   PLEASE DISCLOSE HOW MR. GOFF HAS BEEN "ASSOCIATED" WITH HAMPSHIRE
            EQUITY PARTNERS SINCE AUGUST 1998. SEE ITEM 401(E) OF REGULATION
            S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 43 of the prospectus to delete the words
            "associated with" and insert the words "employed by" to indicate
            that Mr. Goff has been employed by Hampshire Equity Partners since
            August 1998.

Board of Directors Composition After the Offering, page 43

      43.   YOU STATE THAT YOU INTEND TO AVAIL YOURSELF OF THE NASDAQ RULE
            4350(C) CONTROLLED COMPANY EXCEPTION THAT APPLIES TO COMPANIES WHERE
            MORE THAN 50% OF THE STOCKHOLDER VOTING POWER IS HELD BY AN
            INDIVIDUAL, GROUP, OR ANOTHER COMPANY. PLEASE DISCLOSE THE
            INDIVIDUAL, GROUP, OR COMPANY THAT HAS THE 50% VOTING POWER IN YOU.
            ALSO, PLEASE DISCLOSE YOUR PLANS FOR COMPLYING WITH NASDAQ RULES
            SHOULD THE ENTITY'S OWNERSHIP INTEREST FALL BELOW THE 50% OWNERSHIP
            THRESHOLD.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 43 of the prospectus to indicate that Hampshire
            Equity Partners II, L.P. holds more than 50% of the voting power in
            the Company. The Company has also disclosed that the Company intends
            to comply with the Nasdaq rules in the event Hampshire's ownership
            falls below 50% and, as stated on pages 43 and 44 of the prospectus,
            has established the necessary governance structure to ensure
            compliance with applicable rules, including the establishment of a
            board of directors with a majority of independent directors and the
            establishment of an audit committee chaired by a "financial expert"
            as defined under the Nasdaq rules.

      44.   PLEASE DISCLOSE WHETHER ANY OF THE FIVE DIRECTORS THAT WILL TAKE
            OFFICE FOLLOWING THE OFFERING ARE HAMPSHIRE'S NOMINATED DIRECTORS.
            IF SO, PLEASE STATE WHICH DIRECTORS WERE NOMINATED BY HAMPSHIRE.
            ALSO, PLEASE TELL US HOW MR. FLYNN SATISFIES THE INDEPENDENCE
            REQUIREMENTS OF THE NASDAQ RULES.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 43 of the prospectus to indicate that the sole
            Hampshire-nominated director will be Gregory Flynn. The majority of
            the board of directors will be independent, and the three
            independent directors will be John Lupo, Tracy Noll and the director
            nominee. The Company does not intend for Gregory Flynn to satisfy
            the independence requirements of the Nasdaq rules and, because the
            majority of the board of directors comprises independent directors,
            the Company does not believe it is necessary for Mr. Flynn to
            satisfy such requirements.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 18


Director Compensation, page 46

      45.   PLEASE DISCLOSE THE AMOUNT OF OPTIONS GIVEN TO YOUR DIRECTORS AS
            COMPENSATION FOR THEIR SERVICES AND THE EXERCISE PRICE OF THE
            OPTIONS. SEE ITEM 402(G) OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 46 of the prospectus to include the amount of
            options given to the Company's independent directors as compensation
            for their services and the exercise price of such options.

Management Consulting Agreement, page 55

      46.   PLEASE FILE YOUR AMENDED AND RESTATED MANAGEMENT CONSULTING
            AGREEMENT, EFFECTIVE FEBRUARY 1, 2004, AS AN EXHIBIT TO THIS
            DOCUMENT. ALSO, PLEASE DISCLOSE WHETHER THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT
            ARE COMPARABLE TO THOSE YOU COULD HAVE OBTAINED FROM AN UNAFFILIATED
            THIRD PARTY.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by filing with
            Amendment No. 1 the Amended and Restated Management Consulting
            Agreement, effective February 1, 2004, as Exhibit 10.14. The Company
            has also complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 55 of the prospectus to state that the Company
            believes the terms of the Amended and Restated Management Consulting
            Agreement are comparable to those the Company could have obtained
            from an unaffiliated third party.

      47.   IN YOUR STOCKHOLDERS AGREEMENT DATED APRIL 13, 1999, YOU STATE THAT
            FOUR MEMBERS OF YOUR BOARD MAY BE DESIGNATED BY THE OWNERS OF THE
            MAJORITY OF THE VOTING STOCK BENEFICIALLY OWNED BY HAMPSHIRE EQUITY
            PARTNERS AND ITS AFFILIATES. HOWEVER, ACCORDING TO YOUR NOMINATING
            AGREEMENT WITH HAMPSHIRE EQUITY PARTNERS, HAMPSHIRE IS PERMITTED TO
            DESIGNATE ONLY UP TO TWO DIRECTORS TO BE NOMINATED, DEPENDING ON THE
            HAMPSHIRE'S STOCK OWNERSHIP. PLEASE CLARIFY WHETHER THE NOMINATING
            AGREEMENT WILL SUPERSEDE THIS PROVISION OF THE STOCKHOLDERS
            AGREEMENT.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 55 of the prospectus to clarify the fact that,
            pursuant to its terms, all of the provisions of the stockholders
            agreement will terminate upon consummation of the offering, other
            than the registration rights described under "Related Party
            Transactions - Stockholders Agreement." In addition, as described in
            the prospectus the parties thereto intend to terminate the
            stockholders agreement in connection with the offering.

Principal and Selling Stockholders, page 57

      48.   PLEASE IDENTIFY THE BENEFICIAL OWNER THAT HAS THE ULTIMATE VOTING OR
            INVESTMENT CONTROL OVER THE SHARES OF HAMPSHIRE EQUITY PARTNERS II,
            L.P. LISTED IN YOUR SELLING SHAREHOLDER TABLE ON PAGE 57. SEE
            INTERPRETATION 60 UNDER SECTION I. REGULATION S-K IN THE DIVISION OF
            CORPORATION FINANCE'S

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 19


            MANUAL OF PUBLICLY AVAILABLE TELEPHONE INTERPRETATIONS (JULY 1997).
            PLEASE UPDATE THIS INFORMATION SO IT IS PRESENTED AS OF THE MOST
            RECENT PRACTICABLE DATE. SEE ITEM 403 OF REGULATION S-K.

            The Company has revised the disclosure on page 57 of the prospectus
            to comply with the Staff's comment.

Lock-Up Agreements, page 62

      49.   PLEASE TELL US WHAT FACTORS CIBC WORK MARKETS CORP. WOULD TAKE INTO
            CONSIDERATION IN DECIDING WHETHER TO CONSENT TO A DISPOSITION OF
            SECURITIES PRIOR TO THE EXPIRATION OF THE LOCK-UP.

            The Company has been advised by CIBC World Markets Corp. that the
            release of any lock-up agreement by it will be considered on a
            case-by-case basis. Factors in any such decision may include the
            length of time before the lock-up agreement expires, the number of
            shares involved, the reason for the requested release, market
            conditions, the trading price of the Company's common stock, and the
            identity of the person or entity seeking the release (i.e. the
            Company or one of the Company's affiliates, shareholders, executive
            officers or directors). The Company has been advised by the
            underwriters that the underwriters have no current intention of
            waiving the lock-ups.

Underwriting, page 64

      50.   PLEASE DISCLOSE WHICH OF YOUR SELLING SHAREHOLDERS ARE AFFILIATES,
            AND DISCLOSE THAT AN AFFILIATE MAY BE DEEMED TO BE AN UNDERWRITER
            UNDER THE FEDERAL SECURITIES LAWS.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure on page 66 of the prospectus in accordance with the
            Staff's comment.

      51.   PLEASE IDENTIFY ANY MEMBERS OF THE UNDERWRITING SYNDICATE THAT WILL
            ENGAGE IN ANY ELECTRONIC OFFER, SALE, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE SHARES
            AND DESCRIBE THEIR PROCEDURES TO US SUPPLEMENTALLY. IF YOU BECOME
            AWARE OF ANY MEMBERS OF THE UNDERWRITING SYNDICATE THAT MAY ENGAGE
            IN ELECTRONIC OFFERS, SALES, OR DISTRIBUTIONS AFTER YOU RESPOND TO
            THIS COMMENT, PLEASE SUPPLEMENT YOUR RESPONSE PROMPTLY TO IDENTIFY
            THOSE MEMBERS AND PROVIDE US WITH A DESCRIPTION OF THEIR PROCEDURES.
            ALSO, PLEASE BRIEFLY DESCRIBE ANY ELECTRONIC DISTRIBUTION IN THE
            FILING. IN YOUR DISCUSSION OF THE PROCEDURES, TELL US HOW THEY
            ENSURE THAT THE DISTRIBUTION COMPLIES WITH SECTION 5 OF THE
            SECURITIES ACT. IN PARTICULAR, PLEASE ADDRESS:

                  -     THE COMMUNICATION USED;

                  -     THE AVAILABILITY OF THE PRELIMINARY PROSPECTUS;

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 20


                  -     THE MANNER OF CONDUCTING THE DISTRIBUTION AND SALE, SUCH
                        AS THE USE OF INDICATIONS OF INTEREST OR CONDITIONAL
                        OFFERS; AND

                  -     THE FUNDING OF AN ACCOUNT AND PAYMENT OF THE PURCHASE
                        PRICE.

            FINALLY, PLEASE TELL US WHETHER YOU OR THE UNDERWRITERS HAVE ANY
            ARRANGEMENTS WITH A THIRD PARTY TO HOST OR ACCESS YOUR PRELIMINARY
            PROSPECTUS ON THE INTERNET. IF SO, IDENTIFY THE PARTY AND THE
            WEBSITE, DESCRIBE THE MATERIAL TERMS OF YOUR AGREEMENT AND PROVIDE
            US WITH A COPY OF ANY WRITTEN AGREEMENT. PROVIDE US ALSO WITH COPIES
            OF ALL INFORMATION CONCERNING YOUR COMPANY OR PROSPECTUS THAT HAS
            APPEARED ON THEIR WEBSITE. AGAIN, IF YOU SUBSEQUENTLY ENTER INTO ANY
            SUCH ARRANGEMENTS, PROMPTLY SUPPLEMENT YOUR RESPONSE. WE MAY HAVE
            FURTHER COMMENT.

            Based on information provided to the Company by CIBC World
            Markets Corp., Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC, SG Cowen & Co., LLC
            and Piper Jaffray & Co., neither they nor any of their affiliates
            intend to engage in any electronic offer, sale or distribution in
            connection with the offering.

            The Company has also been informed by CIBC World Markets Corp.,
            Wachovia Capital Markets, LLC, SG Cowen & Co., LLC and Piper Jaffray
            & Co. (collectively, the "Representatives") that they do not
            currently have any arrangement or intention to host or provide
            access to the preliminary prospectus on the Internet. If any of the
            Representatives chooses to host or provide access to the preliminary
            prospectus on the Internet, they will do so on a password protected
            website such as Yahoo! Net RoadShow, inform the Commission of their
            intention and inform the Commission on which website they intend to
            host or provide access to the preliminary prospectus.

      52.   PLEASE TELL US WHETHER YOU PLAN TO HAVE A DIRECTED SHARE PROGRAM FOR
            EMPLOYEES AND OTHERS. IF SO, PLEASE SUPPLEMENTALLY TELL US THE
            MECHANICS OF HOW AND WHEN THESE SHARES WILL BE OFFERED AND SOLD TO
            PERSONS IN THE DIRECTED SHARE PROGRAM. FOR EXAMPLE, PLEASE EXPLAIN
            FOR US HOW YOU WILL DETERMINE THE PROSPECTIVE RECIPIENTS OF RESERVED
            SHARES. TELL US WHEN AND HOW THEY WILL INDICATE THEIR INTEREST IN
            PURCHASING SHARES. ALSO, PLEASE TELL US HOW AND WHEN THE ISSUER AND
            UNDERWRITERS WILL CONTACT THE DIRECT SHARE INVESTORS, INCLUDING THE
            TYPES OF COMMUNICATIONS USED. WHEN WILL THE SHARES AND MONEY BE
            EXCHANGED? WHEN DO PURCHASERS BECOME COMMITTED TO PURCHASE THEIR
            SHARES? HOW AND WHEN WILL THE NUMBER OF SHARES OFFERED BE
            DETERMINED? WILL THE PROCEDURES FOR THE DIRECTED SHARE PROGRAM
            DIFFER FROM THE PROCEDURES FOR THE GENERAL OFFERING TO THE PUBLIC?

            The Company does not plan to have a directed share program for
            employees or others in connection with the offering.

      53.   PLEASE TELL US WHETHER ONE OF THE UNDERWRITERS, OTHER THAN CIBC
            WORLD MARKETS CORP., WILL ACT AS A QUALIFIED INDEPENDENT
            UNDERWRITER.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 21


            The Company has been advised by the Representatives that there is no
            "conflict of interest" or any other situation described by the
            Conduct Rules of the National Association of Securities Dealers,
            Inc. (the "Conduct Rules") that would necessitate a "qualified
            independent underwriter" for the offering as prescribed by Conduct
            Rule 2720(c)(3).

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Note 2, Summary of Significant Accounting Policies, page F-7

General

      54.   WE NOTE YOUR DISCLOSURE ON PAGE 23 THAT HANDLING AND DISTRIBUTION
            CENTER COSTS ARE INCLUDED IN SELLING, GENERAL, AND ADMINISTRATIVE
            EXPENSES. PLEASE EXPAND YOUR DISCLOSURE IN THAT SECTION AND IN THE
            NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS TO DESCRIBE THE COSTS INCLUDED IN
            COSTS OF SALES. PLEASE INDICATE SPECIFICALLY WHETHER YOU INCLUDE
            PURCHASING AND RECEIVING COSTS, INSPECTION COSTS, INTERNAL TRANSFER
            COSTS, AND OTHER COSTS OF YOUR DISTRIBUTION NETWORK. FOR THOSE COSTS
            YOU EXCLUDED, SUCH AS THE DISTRIBUTION CENTER COSTS, PLEASE TELL US
            WHY THE COSTS ARE EXCLUDED AND DISCLOSE:

                  -     THE LINE ITEM THAT THE EXCLUDED COSTS ARE INCLUDED IN,
                        FOR EXAMPLE, SELLING GENERAL, AND ADMINISTRATIVE, AND
                        THE AMOUNTS INCLUDED IN EACH LINE ITEM FOR EACH PERIOD
                        PRESENTED; AND

                  -     IN YOUR MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS SECTION,
                        THAT YOUR GROSS MARGINS MAY NOT BE COMPARABLE TO OTHERS,
                        SINCE SOME ENTITIES INCLUDE THE COSTS RELATED TO THEIR
                        DISTRIBUTION NETWORK IN COST OF GOODS SOLD AND OTHERS,
                        LIKE YOU, EXCLUDE ALL OR A PORTION OF THEM FROM GROSS
                        MARGIN, INCLUDING THEM INSTEAD IN A LINE ITEM SUCH AS
                        SELLING, GENERAL, AND ADMINISTRATIVE EXPENSES.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosures within Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
            Condition and Results of Operations and the notes to the financial
            statements to describe the distribution center costs included in
            costs of sales.

Note 2(c), Inventory, page F-7

      55.   WE NOTE THAT YOU RECORD A PROVISION FOR INVENTORY SHRINKAGE. PLEASE
            INCLUDE THE ACTIVITY IN THAT RESERVE IN SCHEDULE II - VALUATION AND
            QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS, UNLESS SUBSTANTIALLY THE SAME INFORMATION IS
            PRESENTED IN THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS. SEE RULES 5-04 AND 12-09 OF
            REGULATION S-X.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by including the
            activity in Note 11 to the financial statements on page F-18 of the
            prospectus.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 22


Note 2(g),  Stock-Based Compensation, page F-8

      56.   PLEASE ADD BASIC AND DILUTED EARNINGS PER SHARE AS REPORTED AND THE
            PER SHARE EFFECT OF THE APPLICATION OF FAS 123 TO THE
            RECONCILIATION. SEE PARAGRAPH 45(C)(1) OF FAS 123.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure within Note 2 of the financial statements on page F-7 of
            the prospectus to include the per share data.

Note 2(h), Revenue Recognition, page F-8

      57.   PLEASE DISCLOSE HOW YOU ACCOUNT FOR SALES RETURNS AND YOUR
            METHODOLOGY FOR DETERMINING A RESERVE FOR SALES RETURNS, IF ANY. IN
            ADDITION, IF CHANGES IN ESTIMATED RETURNS RECOGNIZED ARE MATERIAL,
            PLEASE DISCLOSE. SEE PARAGRAPHS 6-8 OF FAS 48. PLEASE INCLUDE THE
            ACTIVITY IN THE RESERVE IN SCHEDULE II - VALUATION AND QUALIFYING
            ACCOUNTS, UNLESS SUBSTANTIALLY THE SAME INFORMATION IS PRESENTED IN
            THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS. SEE RULES 5-04 AND 12-09 OF REGULATION
            S-X.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by adding
            disclosure on page F-18 of the prospectus regarding how the Company
            accounts for sales returns and its methodology for determining a
            reserve for sales returns. The Company does not believe that the
            reserve for sales returns is material. As of January 29, 2005 and
            January 31, 2004, the Company's reserves for sales returns was
            $70,000 and $40,000, respectively.

Note 2(o), Business Reporting Segments, page F-l0

      58.   WE NOTE THAT YOU REPORT ONLY ONE OPERATING SEGMENT. IN THE BUSINESS
            SECTION ON PAGE 37, YOU DISPLAY REVENUES BY MERCHANDISE ASSORTMENT,
            INCLUDING WOMEN'S, CHILDREN'S, MEN'S, ETC. THEREFORE, IT APPEARS
            THAT DISCRETE FINANCIAL INFORMATION IS AVAILABLE. IN ADDITION, YOU
            MENTION THROUGHOUT THE REGISTRATION STATEMENT THAT ONE OF YOUR
            GROWTH STRATEGIES INVOLVES THE EXPANSION OF ADJACENT PRODUCT
            CATEGORIES, SUCH AS HOME DECOR AND INTIMATE APPAREL. PLEASE TELL US
            HOW YOU CONSIDERED PARAGRAPH 10 OF FAS 131 IN YOUR DETERMINATION
            THAT YOU HAVE ONLY ONE REPORTABLE OPERATING SEGMENT AND WHETHER YOU
            HAVE AGGREGATED SEGMENTS. WE MAY HAVE FURTHER COMMENTS UPON REVIEW
            OF YOUR RESPONSE.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company has
            one operating segment with different merchandise categories. The
            Company does not maintain profit and loss statements or cost centers
            by merchandising categories. Although the Company reviews sales by
            merchandise categories, it does not consider them to be separate,
            reportable segments in relation to FAS 131.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 23


Note 8, Stockholders' Equity, page F-13

      59.   WE NOTE YOU HAVE A STOCK OPTION PLAN THAT PERMITS UP TO
            APPROXIMATELY 75,000 SHARES TO BE GRANTED THROUGH THE ISSUANCES OF
            OPTIONS. WE ASSUME THAT THE ESTIMATE OF FAIR VALUE OF THE UNDERLYING
            STOCK AT THE GRANT DATE IS AT THE DISCRETION OF THE BOARD OF
            DIRECTORS. ALSO, WE NOTE THAT YOU RECORDED COMPENSATION EXPENSE FOR
            THE INTRINSIC VALUE OF OPTIONS GRANTED BASED ON YOUR FAIR VALUE
            ESTIMATE. PLEASE PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

                  -     THE ESTIMATED OFFERING RANGE THAT WAS INITIALLY
                        DISCUSSED WITH THE LEAD UNDERWRITER OR SYNDICATE,
                        INCLUDING THE DATE THE OFFERING PRICE WAS FIRST
                        DISCUSSED EITHER FORMALLY OR INFORMALLY. SPECIFICALLY,
                        TELL US WHETHER THIS WOULD HAVE DIFFERED FROM THE
                        OFFERING PRICE RANGE THAT WOULD NORMALLY HAVE APPEARED
                        ON PAGE 1 OF THE PROSPECTUS IN YOUR INITIAL FILING;

                  -     FOR THE MOST RECENT FISCAL YEAR TO THE LATEST
                        PRACTICABLE DATE, A LISTING OF OPTIONS OR OTHER EQUITY
                        INSTRUMENTS GRANTED TO EMPLOYEES THAT INDICATES THE DATE
                        OF GRANT/ISSUANCE, THE EXERCISE/PURCHASE PRICE, AND THE
                        AMOUNT OF DEFERRED COMPENSATION RECORDED ON EACH
                        GRANT/ISSUANCE;

                  -     OBJECTIVE EVIDENCE OF FAIR VALUE OF THE UNDERLYING
                        SHARES SUPPORTING THE OPTIONS OR SHARE GRANTS. THIS
                        INFORMATION WOULD INCLUDE THE PRICES AT WHICH
                        CONTEMPORANEOUS SALES OF COMMON OR CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED
                        SECURITIES TOOK PLACE, INDEPENDENT APPRAISALS OBTAINED
                        PRIOR TO OPTION GRANTS, OR ANY OTHER INFORMATION THAT
                        SUPPORTS YOUR DETERMINATION OF FAIR VALUE;

                  -     A TIME LINE OF COMPANY SPECIFIC EVENTS THAT SUPPORTS THE
                        RELATIVE INCREASE/DECREASE IN FAIR VALUE OF YOUR EQUITY
                        SECURITIES BASED ON COMPANY SPECIFIC MILESTONES OR OTHER
                        ECONOMIC EVENTS. NOTE THAT THIS TIME LINE SHOULD
                        CULMINATE IN THE OFFERING RANGE INITIALLY DISCUSSED AND
                        CURRENTLY DISCUSSED; AND

                  -     ANY OTHER PERTINENT INFORMATION NECESSARY FOR US TO MAKE
                        AN INDEPENDENT EVALUATION OF YOUR JUDGMENTS/ESTIMATES
                        SURROUNDING THE ISSUE OF STOCK COMPENSATION.

            WE MAY HAVE FURTHER COMMENT UPON REVIEW OF YOUR RESPONSE.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company's
            Board of Directors has determined the fair value of the Company's
            stock on a quarterly basis since the year ended January 2002 by
            using a consistent formula based on the twelve-month rolling EBITDA
            of the Company multiplied by a private company multiple less
            outstanding debt. The price multiple, equal to 5.5 times EBITDA, is
            based on other private transactions observed during the past year.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 24


            Please see Exhibit A attached hereto for the calculation of the
            Company's valuation as of the beginning of fiscal 2004 and as of
            the end of each of the first three quarters of fiscal 2004, and see
            Exhibit B attached hereto for the comparable private company price
            multiples on private transactions.

            The Company supplementally informs the Staff that the Company
            selected CIBC as the lead underwriter during August 2004. The
            estimated offering range initially discussed with CIBC at that time
            was a total market cap value of $160 million to $200 million, based
            upon the Company's projected 2006 earnings. This price range has not
            varied significantly during the Company's relationship with CIBC as
            the lead underwriter. The Company's 2004 actual performance (as now
            shown in the prospectus) did not deviate significantly from the
            range of expected earnings for 2004 during the initial pricing
            discussions.

            Per your request, the Company has supplementally attached a listing
            of all stock option grants from January 1, 2004 to present. No
            options have been granted since October 31, 2004. See Exhibit C
            attached hereto for the grant listing and Exhibit D attached hereto
            for the Black-Scholes calculation of the compensation expense
            required to be disclosed in the financial statements for fiscal
            2004.

            Although no independent appraisals have been conducted in support
            of the Company's valuations for stock option grants, the Company
            believes that Exhibits A and B hereto support the enterprise
            valuations that the Company utilized in assigning appropriate
            values to the 2004 grants. Exhibit A also serves as a timeline of
            "milestones or economic events" as it shows the consistent
            quarterly valuation of the Company's stock based on quarterly
            earnings performance. Please note that the Company did not make a
            determination to proceed with the initial public offering process
            until December 2004. Also, please note that, consistent with many
            other apparel companies operating in the retail industry, the
            Company earned approximately 67% of its net income for fiscal 2004
            during the fourth quarter and, therefore, would realize a
            significant increase in valuation upon the achievement of this
            level of sales and earnings performance in the fourth quarter.

            Based on the above, the Company believes that it has properly valued
            it stock transactions during fiscal 2004.

Note 10, Related Party Transactions, page F-16

      60.   PLEASE EXPAND YOUR DISCLOSURE TO INDICATE HOW MANAGEMENT FEES ARE
            DETERMINED AND THE NATURE OF THE CONSULTING SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE
            AFFILIATE. ALSO, PLEASE DISCLOSE THE TERMINATION FEE AND ANY OTHER
            PERTINENT TERMS OF THE AGREEMENT.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure in the revised notes to the financial statements. See
            Note 11 on page F-18.

Securities and Exchange Commission
April 7, 2005
Page 25


39 Weeks Ended October 30, 2004 and November 1, 2003
Condensed Statements of Cash Flows, page F-31

      61.   WE NOTE THE MATURITIES OF YOUR REVOLVING LINES OF CREDIT ARE 12
            MONTHS AND MORE. PLEASE ADVISE OR REVISE TO SHOW CASH BORROWINGS AND
            REPAYMENTS GROSS. SEE PARAGRAPH 13 OF SFAS 95.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            Statements of Cash Flows on page F-5 of the prospectus to show cash
            borrowings and gross repayments.

PART II

Signatures, page II-5

      62.   IN ADDITION TO THOSE WHO HAVE SIGNED YOUR DOCUMENT ALREADY, PLEASE
            HAVE YOUR CONTROLLER OR PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTING OFFICER SIGN YOUR
            DOCUMENT, OR IDENTIFY THE PERSON WHO IS FULFILLING THAT FUNCTION.
            SEE INSTRUCTIONS TO THE SIGNATURES SECTION OF FORM S-1.

            The Company has complied with the Staff's comment by revising the
            disclosure to indicate Thomas Stoltz is the Company's principal
            accounting officer. Please see the reference to Thomas Stoltz as the
            Company's principal accounting officer on page II-5.

                          *    *    *    *    *    *

      We would greatly appreciate your prompt attention in resolving any
remaining open issues. If you have any questions regarding the responses to the
Staff's comments, please do not hesitate to contact the undersigned at (212)
318-6400.

      Kindly acknowledge receipt of the foregoing responses by stamping the
enclosed additional copy of this letter and returning the same to the
undersigned.

Sincerely,



/s/ William F. Schwitter
for PAUL, HASTINGS, JANOFSKY & WALKER LLP


cc:   R. Edward Anderson
      John Fieldsend, Staff Attorney

                                   EXHIBIT A
                                   ---------

CITI TRENDS, INC.
COMMON STOCK VALUATION ANALYSIS

($000's Except Shares Outstanding)

Fourth First Second Third Quarter Quarter Quarter Quarter 2003 2004 2004 2004 Actual Actual Actual Actual 31-JAN-04 1-MAY-04 31-JUL-04 30-OCT-04 VALUATION VALUATION VALUATION VALUATION --------- --------- --------- --------- Operating Data -- EBITDA $ 14,130 $ 14,728 $ 14,780 $ 15,121 Multiple 5.5X 5.5X 5.5X 5.5X Enterprise Value $ 77,715 $ 81,004 $ 81,290 $ 83,166 Cash from Option Proceeds $ 567 $ 712 $ 776 $ 1,028 Revolver Balance & Lease Obligations 3,481 3,820 3,721 2,675 Preferred Stock 5,160 5,241 4,823 4,404 Equity Value $ 69,641 $ 72,655 $ 73,522 $ 77,115 Primary Shares Outstanding 357,500 357,500 357,500 357,500 Options 53,596 54,724 55,899 57,823 Ex. Price ($10/share, divided by 1,000 for presentation in '000s) $ 0.01 $ 0.01 $ 0.01 $ 0.02 Exercise Proceeds $ 567 $ 712 $ 776 $ 1,028 Fully Diluted Shares Outstanding 411,096 412,224 413,399 415,323 Per Share Value - Pre Liquidity Discount $ 169.40 $ 176.25 $ 177.85 $ 185.67 Liquidity Discount (Based on Ibbotson's Size Premium) 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% 0.0% Per Share Value $ 169.40 $ 176.25 $ 177.85 $ 185.67 USE $ 170.00 $ 177.00 $ 178.00 $ 186.00
EXHIBIT B --------- CITI TRENDS, INC. COMPARABLE SPECIALTY RETAIL TRANSACTION LISTING
TRANSACTION VALUE AS A MULTIPLE OF LTM BUYER SELLER EBITDA - ------------------------ ------------------------------- --------------- Crescent Capital Loehman's 7.10x Saunders Karp & Megrue CoMark 4.10x Saunders Karp & Megrue Ollies 5.90x Kids Outlet LLC W&W Wholesale Inc. 5.60x Casual Male Retail Group Rochester Big and Tall Clothing 5.70x Sun Capital & Cerberus Mervyns Inc. (Target) 5.90x Genesco Hat World 7.50x Gart Sports Sports Authority 4.60x Advance Auto Discount Auto Parts 6.60x Gart Sports Oshmans 3.10x Bon-Ton Stores Elder-Beerman Stores 5.90x Retail Brand Alliance Brooks Brothers 4.80x AVERAGE 5.56X
EXHIBIT C --------- CITI TRENDS, INC. Option Worksheet
First Quarter 2004 ------------------------------------------ Date of Strike Options Granted Balance --------- ------- ----------- Name Title Grant Price Forfeits Exerc Additions 5/1/2004 - -------------- -------------- ------- --------- --------- ------- ------------ --------- John Lupo Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 100 Tracy Noll Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 100 Chris Bergen Contoller 3/23/2004 $170.00 200 200 Charles Cheeseman Director of DC 4/19/2004 $170.00 400 400 S.L. Timberman Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 400 400 Amanda Beggs Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 200 200 Rimma Shusterman Buyer 5/3/2004 $177.00 Jack O'Hara VP of Real Estate 5/26/2004 $177.00 Diane Coker District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 Eliza Lowery District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 Debbie Addison District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 Paula Allen Buyer 9/17/2004 $178.00 Chris Hutton Dirctor of IS 9/29/2004 $178.00 Jane Neville Divisional Merchandise Manager 10/14/2004 $178.00 HEP Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Bellino Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Anderson Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Dillon Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Noll Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Total Options - - 1,400 1,400 ========= ========= ========== ========
Second Quarter 2004 ------------------------------------------ Date of Strike Options Granted Balance ---------- ------- ---------- Name Title Grant Price Forfeits Exerc Additions 7/31/2004 - -------------- -------------- ------- --------- ---------- ------- ------------ --------- John Lupo Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 Tracy Noll Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 Chris Bergen Contoller 3/23/2004 $170.00 200 Charles Cheeseman Director of DC 4/19/2004 $170.00 400 S.L. Timberman Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 400 Amanda Beggs Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 200 Rimma Shusterman Buyer 5/3/2004 $177.00 600 600 Jack O'Hara VP of Real Estate 5/26/2004 $177.00 200 200 Diane Coker District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 Eliza Lowery District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 Debbie Addison District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 Paula Allen Buyer 9/17/2004 $178.00 Chris Hutton Dirctor of IS 9/29/2004 $178.00 Jane Neville Divisional Merchandise Manager 10/14/2004 $178.00 HEP Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Bellino Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Anderson Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Dillon Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Noll Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 Total Options - - 800 2,200 ========= ========= ========== ========
Third Quarter 2004 ------------------------------------------ Date of Strike Options Granted Balance ----------- ------ ---------- Name Title Grant Price Forfeits Exerc Additions 10/30/2004 - -------------- -------------- ------- --------- ----------- ------ ----------- ---------- John Lupo Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 Tracy Noll Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 Chris Bergen Contoller 3/23/2004 $170.00 200 Charles Cheeseman Director of DC 4/19/2004 $170.00 400 S.L. Timberman Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 400 Amanda Beggs Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 200 Rimma Shusterman Buyer 5/3/2004 $177.00 600 Jack O'Hara VP of Real Estate 5/26/2004 $177.00 200 Diane Coker District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 200 200 Eliza Lowery District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 200 200 Debbie Addison District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 200 200 Paula Allen Buyer 9/17/2004 $178.00 200 200 Chris Hutton Dirctor of IS 9/29/2004 $178.00 200 200 Jane Neville Divisional Merchandise Manager 10/14/2004 $178.00 400 400 HEP Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 1,137 1 ,137 Bellino Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 26 26 Anderson Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 12 12 Dillon Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 18 18 Noll Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 6 6 Total Options - - 2,599 4,799 ========= ========= ========== ========
Fourth Quarter 2004 ------------------------------------------ Date of Strike Options Granted Balance --------- ------- ----------- Name Title Grant Price Forfeits Exerc Additions 1/29/2004 - -------------- -------------- ------- --------- --------- ------- ------------ ---------- John Lupo Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 Tracy Noll Director 3/10/2004 $170.00 100 Chris Bergen Contoller 3/23/2004 $170.00 200 Charles Cheeseman Director of DC 4/19/2004 $170.00 400 S.L. Timberman Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 400 Amanda Beggs Buyer 4/29/2004 $170.00 200 Rimma Shusterman Buyer 5/3/2004 $177.00 600 Jack O'Hara VP of Real Estate 5/26/2004 $177.00 200 Diane Coker District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 200 Eliza Lowery District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 200 Debbie Addison District Manager 5/30/2004 $178.00 200 Paula Allen Buyer 9/17/2004 $178.00 200 Chris Hutton Dirctor of IS 9/29/2004 $178.00 200 Jane Neville Divisional Merchandise Manager 10/14/2004 $178.00 400 HEP Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 1 ,137 Bellino Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 26 Anderson Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 12 Dillon Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 18 Noll Shareholder 10/30/2004 $178.00 6 Total Options - - - 4,799 ========= ========= ========== ========
EXHIBIT D --------- FAS 123 Pro Forma Net Income Disclosures:
Compensation Fiscal 2004 FYE 1/29/05 Expense Grants Pre-Tax After-Tax Pre-Tax After-Tax Net Income As Reported 7,257,245 --------------- Addback: Option expense recorded by CitiTrends 44,627 Expensed Option expense recorded for Hampshire 58,672 103,299 63,508 58,672 36,072 in Income Statement Deduct: Management 123 expense (153,672) 1 (85,824) (52,765) Director 123 expense (9,869) 2 (9,869) (6,068) Anti-Dilutive expense (61,871) (225,412) (138,583) 3 (61,871) (38,038) ---------------------------------------- -------------------------- Net effect (122,113) (157,564) (96,870) Footnote 123 Tax Impact 47,038 (122,113) (75,075) (98,892) (60,799) Disclosure Only --------------- FAS 123 Pro Forma Income 7,182,170 =============== Tax Rate 38.52%
1 SEE DETAILED SCHEDULE ATTACHED 2 SEE DETAILED SCHEDULE ATTACHED 3 SEE DETAILED SCHEDULE ATTACHED SCHEDULE 1 Note: The following schedule calculates compensation expense to be recognized for management's options under FAS 123.
EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION DATA INPUTS ----------------------------------------------------------------- Number of Options Grant Exercise Stock Expiration Max Vesting Name Type Granted Date Price Price Date Life Date ---- ---- ------- ---- ----- ----- ---- ---- ---- FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 5/1/04 $170.00 $170.00 5/1/13 10.0 5/1/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 5/1/04 $170.00 $170.00 5/1/13 10.0 5/1/06 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 5/1/04 $170.00 $170.00 5/1/13 10.0 5/1/07 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 5/1/04 $170.00 $170.00 5/1/13 10.0 5/1/08 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,200 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average $170.00 $170.00 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,200 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 7/31/04 $177.00 $177.00 7/31/13 10.0 7/31/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 7/31/04 $177.00 $177.00 7/31/13 10.0 7/31/06 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 7/31/04 $177.00 $177.00 7/31/13 10.0 7/31/07 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 7/31/04 $177.00 $177.00 7/31/13 10.0 7/31/08 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 800 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average $177.00 $177.00 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 800 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10/30/04 $178.00 $178.00 10/30/13 10.0 10/30/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10/30/04 $178.00 $178.00 10/30/13 10.0 10/30/06 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10/30/04 $178.00 $178.00 10/30/13 10.0 10/30/07 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10/30/04 $178.00 $178.00 10/30/13 10.0 10/30/08 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,400 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average $178.00 $178.00 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,400
EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION DATA INPUTS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- Number of Options Vesting Expected Risk-free Dividend Option Name Type Granted Period Life Rate Volatility Yield Value ---- ---- ------- ------ ---- ---- ---------- ----- ----- FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 1.0 2.0 1.91% 50.00% 0.0% $49.35 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 2.0 3.0 2.44% 50.00% 0.0% $61.12 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 3.0 4.0 2.86% 50.00% 0.0% $71.13 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 4.0 4.0 2.86% 50.00% 0.0% $71.14 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,200 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average 3.3 2.5% 50.0% 0.0% $63.18 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,200 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 1.0 2.0 1.91% 50.00% 0.0% $51.38 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 2.0 3.0 2.44% 50.00% 0.0% $63.64 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 3.0 4.0 2.86% 50.00% 0.0% $74.06 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 4.0 4.0 2.86% 50.00% 0.0% $74.07 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 800 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average 3.3 2.5% 50.0% 0.0% $65.79 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 800 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 1.0 2.0 1.91% 50.00% 0.0% $51.67 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 2.0 3.0 2.44% 50.00% 0.0% $64.00 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 3.0 4.0 2.86% 50.00% 0.0% $74.48 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 4.0 4.0 2.86% 50.00% 0.0% $74.48 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,400 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average 3.3 2.5% 50.0% 0.0% $66.16 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,400
TOTAL FAIR MARKET VALUE INPUTS ----------------------------------------------------------------- Number of Annual Total Estimated Total Options Forfeiture Survival Total Options Fair Name Type Granted Rate Rate Exercised Value ---- ---- ------- ---- ---- --------- ----- FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 10.0% 90.0% 270 $13,323 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 10.0% 81.0% 243 $14,853 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 10.0% 72.9% 219 $15,556 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 10.0% 65.6% 197 $14,002 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,200 929 $57,734 FY 2004 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average 10.0% 77.4% Total - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,200 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 10.0% 90.0% 180 $9,248 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 10.0% 81.0% 162 $10,310 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 10.0% 72.9% 146 $10,798 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 10.0% 65.6% 131 $9,719 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 800 619 $40,074 FY 2004 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average 10.0% 77.4% Total - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 800 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10.0% 90.0% 315 $16,275 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10.0% 81.0% 284 $18,144 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10.0% 72.9% 255 $19,002 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 10.0% 65.6% 230 $17,104 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,400 1,083 $70,526 FY 2004 - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Weighted Average 10.0% 77.4% Total - --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,400
EXPENSE TO BE RECOGNIZED (FOOTNOTE DISCLOSURE ONLY) ------------------------------------------------------------ Number of Options Name Type Granted 2004 2005 2006 2007 Totals ---- ---- ------- ---- ---- ---- ---- ------ FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 13,323 13,323 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 7,426 7,426 14,853 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 5,185 5,185 5,185 15,556 Citi Trds Non Quals 300 3,500 3,500 3,500 3,500 14,002 - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,200 29,435 16,112 8,686 3,500 $ 57,734 - --------------------------------- Weighted Average -- -- -- - --------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,200 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 9,248 9,248 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 5,155 5,155 10,310 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 3,599 3,599 3,599 10,798 Citi Trds Non Quals 200 2,430 2,430 2,430 2,430 9,719 - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 800 20,432 11,184 6,029 2,430 $ 40,074 - --------------------------------- Weighted Average -- -- -- - --------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 800 FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 16,275 16,275 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 9,072 9,072 18,144 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 6,334 6,334 6,334 19,002 Citi Trds Non Quals 350 4,276 4,276 4,276 4,276 17,104 - ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- All Total 1,400 35,957 19,682 10,610 4,276 $ 70,526 - --------------------------------- Weighted Average -- -- -- - --------------------------------- Totals for FY2004 1,400 85,824 46,978 25,325 10,206 168,333
SCHEDULE 2 NOTE: NEW DIRECTOR OPTIONS WERE ISSUED IN FISCAL YEAR ENDING 1/29/05:
EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION DATA INPUTS -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Number of Options Grant Exercise Stock Expiration Maximum Vesting Vesting Expected Risk-free Name Type Granted Date Price Price Date Life Date Period Life Rate - ---- ---- -------- ---- ----- ----- ---- ---- ---- ------ ---- ---- Citi Trds Non Quals 200 A 3/10/04 $170.00 $170.00 3/10/14 10.0 3/10/05 1.0 2.0 1.91% EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION DATA INPUTS TOTAL FAIR MARKET VALUE INPUTS EXPENSE TO BE RECOGNIZED -------------------------------------- -------------------------------------------- ------------------------- Annual Total Estimated Total Dividend Option Forfeiture Survival Total Options Fair Name Volatility Yield Value Rate Rate Exercised Value 2004 - ---- ---------- ----- ----- ---- ---- --------- ----- ---- Citi Trds 50.00% 0.0% $49.35 0.0% 100.0% 200 $9,869 9,869
SCHEDULE 3 NOTE: ANTI-DILUTIVE OPTIONS WERE ISSUED IN THIRD QUARTER FISCAL 2004 ONLY:
EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION DATA INPUTS --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Number of Options Grant Exercise Stock Expiration Maximum Vesting Vesting Expected Risk-free Name Type Granted Date Price Price Date Life Date Period Life Rate - ---- ---- -------- ---- ----- ----- ---- ---- ---- ------ ---- ---- Citi Trds Non Quals 1,137 A 10/30/04 $178.00 $178.00 10/30/13 10.0 10/30/04 0.0 2.0 1.86% Citi Trds Non Quals 62 A 10/30/04 $178.00 $178.00 10/30/13 10.0 10/30/04 0.0 2.0 1.86% EMPLOYEE COMPENSATION DATA INPUTS TOTAL FAIR MARKET VALUE INPUTS EXPENSE TO BE RECOGNIZED ----------------------------------- ------------------------------------------ ------------------------- Annual Total Estimated Total Dividend Option Forfeiture Survival Total Options Fair Name Volatility Yield Value Rate Rate Exercised Value 2004 2005 - ---- ---------- ----- ----- ---- ---- --------- ----- ----- ---- Citi Trds 50.00% 0.0% $51.60 0.0% 100.0% 1,137 $58,672 58,672 Citi Trds 50.00% 0.0% $51.60 0.0% 100.0% 62 $3,199 3,199 ------ Annual Expense 61,871 ======